Home

2011 Dodge Charger Owners` Manual

1. O General Information O Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System O Five 5peed Automatic Transmission Lear RIN ES s ca a ORAAL EE RAL RE HERE Eie PR EE ER TER NE id AR EE EE RES ears E Bl All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped E Driving On Slippery Surfaces 342 STARTING AND OPERATING xe O Acceleration 5 seed de iS wes ER OR HE EE 359 uli do amp oe in aa S EED NE AU RE HD RR 360 N Driving Through Water 360 O Flowing Rising Water se ese see 361 O Shallow Standing Water 361 W Power Steering ns ogee eek he kee ends een 363 ll Multi Displacement System MDS If Equipped 5 7L Engine Only i ses sse 364 M Parking Brake oa ase ES eee ORDE HE 364 N Anti Lock Brake System 367 Bl Electronic Brake Control System 369 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 369 O Traction Control System TCS sie Lr 369 O Brake Assist System BAS 370 O Electronic Stability Control ESC 370 O ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC Off Indicator Light 373 EL Synchronizing ESG via ings bao og je ep 374 W Tire Safety Information 374 Pie Wart dir rcc 2654 4 9096 END DNE 374 O Tire Identification Number TIN 378 O Tire Terminology And Definitions DIM H Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 380 W Tires General Information
2. 194 ACC ENUY is og oa egre s sp pd Ge qo ed 19 Fastr tient Clistet usos deba HEER s 189 Intensity COMMO kanes ik sees et ici d eus 196 Elsie OR eae oa tet ERE deo des 196 244 kielie onactun canna gas BERE EED nee EN 506 Lights On Reminder saevo e nx RE SR ae 192 LOW Duel uus sade RIA SERE d Und den d 287 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 276 Map RKEIdINE Ar Q 194 244 548 INDEX M Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 197 cc PPP EE EE A 194 ROBO sas aware a soe Bees a ES ee ET 194 244 Seat Belt Reminder 2 6 aces cod uen e e Or tn bes 281 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 279 ede MEET 503 504 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 276 xdi PTT 190 Theft Alarm Security Alarm aue duce vane Res 2 9 Tire Pressure Monitoring IPMS 275 997 TiacHot CONDI uu Gees ea o e RAS DUE s 373 Turm oignal se rarase s x uen BARA AN a N 87 193 Mari DAO m 100 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 273 Load Leveling System ske dos es ee omms 267 Loading Weblele ass eder rer TOR pond ECT 417 418 Capac sigre rpi naik Ri Ue Gah ae RE 418 dies a a ere ee ee AE EE 380 LOCKS as oe BERE VERRE KOOS rn 27 N INDEX 549 PUNO LISE siek RARR REK EERS EAE AS 29 Map kResding Die DB 22554 5 5629 VERRE EE 244 Automatic Door 4 354949 308 BR HERE ERROR S 29 Master Cylinder Drakes 22 ies buen Rh 484 hale PEOUSOUDTI pcm nca d ot oe ee are SEED Ge a 30 Memory Feature Memory Seat 18
3. 384 BTE C 1209490 ee kG P dE ee d 384 O Tire Inflation Pressures 385 NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 343 o Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 387 aRadial PI Dies ass tee isse bea AT 387 O Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped s2 s 387 XO Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 388 O Full Size Spare If Equipped 389 oO Limited Use Spare If Equipped 389 Mm lie SOS oo ur Sa hoe ode ep eee ps 390 O Tread Wear Indicators 991 Hi diie O Te si sns tees RES KERE SES 391 Hie laee eri Mies ssa dede er ege EE das 992 NM Luo Chins sis ode ee ie E ERE 393 B Snow Tires 0 2 ES eee 395 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 395 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 397 Bi ie ou MAAR EE OE hah eed n 929 O Premium System If Equipped 402 O General Information ss 406 N Fuel Requirements 0 3 6L Engine If Equipped O 5 7L Engine If Equipped O Reformulated Gasoline 408 B Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 408 O E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 408 o MMT In Gasoline 223 2924 999w xus 409 O Materials Added To Fuel 410 344 STARTING AND OPERATING ee O Fuel System Cautions ax s rir Ed 410 M Adding Fuel 4 44 ss SR 9 HER SR ARE EDE 415 H Carbon Monoxide Warnings 411 O Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release 416 ll Flexible Fuel
4. 276 461 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 2 4 s22ax4 84 CHECKS Sally e Ga cea chet ae ER io er UR AE 84 Child Restraint sissies RS RR 71 72 73 77 80 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 75 77 Child ale LOCKS ius sese dans ee PERSE 30 Clean Air GasOune ai BAR o HE PEL ORE 408 Cleaning nig JT TT 491 Windshield Wiper Blades usse e ma 474 Cate CON sse hee AAR oan ba BAR 929 ou Holder iu yes cope bee iey HARE ee De 262 Cold Weather Operation 0 348 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 328 Compact Spare Ie sex dd RUE Ev S ERRORS 388 Computer THp rIravel ies ss SE 04034944464 294 Connector DC 324 N INDEX 541 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 324 CONSERVING TUG zu 9er 258 oes seas bo EERS 202 Console Floor 255 9 oud Fey ER EARN E RIS 262 Console Overhead eee 244 Contract Service tn OR EER Eb beatae ages 531 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 481 COONS DUSIBIDI wads ages Sop dtm Radars OAR 478 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 480 Coolant Capaci vasesuaws vere v 9x33 ees 507 Coolant Level 4 400 0040 Sh ey RA 479 482 Disposal oi Used Coolant 2222 v0 somes 482 Drain Flush and Refill 479 IDSDBC HON n seeks e Rh ai ay DE pe me AE UR OR 482 Points to Remember 00040 483 Presswie Cap C 481 Radiator Cap s setate fetu ene eee awe es 481 Selection of Coolant Antifr
5. 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF e For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition 2 Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle e l ress LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and or passenger door open e Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion e Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter 3 If any doors are open close them To Disarm The System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information press the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle NOTE e The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during trunk entry Pressing the RKE transmitter or Passive Entry TRUNK button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the int
6. 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 382 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 EXAMP
7. Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Reclining The Seatback The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward Push the seatback switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Continued N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 WARNING Contin
8. e Display Mode When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings To change Mode status press and release the Day Night or Auto soft key followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Display Brightness with Headlights ON When in this display you may select display brightness with the headlights on and the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale in between the and soft keys followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Display Brightness with Headlights OFF When in this display you may select display brightness with the headlights on and the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale in between the and soft keys followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Set Language When in this display you may select one of three lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the Set Language soft key and then press the desired language sof key until a check mark appears next to the language showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Units When in this display you may select to have the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped changed between US and Metric units of measure Press US or Metric until a check mark appears next to
9. selecting any point on the scale in between the and soft keys followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Mode Press the Mode soft key to change this display When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings To change Mode status press and release the Day Night or Auto soft key followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e language Press the Language soft key to change this display When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the Eng lish French Frangais Spanish Espafiol button to select the language preferred followed by pressing the arrow back soft key Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language e Units Press the Units soft key to change this display When in this display you may select to have the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped changed between US and Metric units of measure Press US or Metric followed by pressing the arrow back soft key Then as you continue the information will display in the selected units of measure e Voice Response Press the Voice Response soft key to change this display When in this display you may change the Voice Response Length settings To change the Voice Response Length press and release the Brief or Long soft key followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Touch Screen Beep
10. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue 492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and MOPAR Carpet Cleaner or equivalent for carpeting Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth or MOPAR Satin Select or equivalent Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and sho
11. IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel 1 ON OFF 2 RES 4 CANCEL 3 SET NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator light in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected spee
12. Press the Touch Screen Beep soft key to change this display When in this display you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touch screen button soft key is NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 pressed To change the Touch Screen Beep setting press and release the On or Off soft key followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Fuel Saver Display Press the Fuel Saver Display soft key to change this display The ECO message is located in the instrument cluster display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press the Fuel Saver Display soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key Clock e Set Time Press the Set Time soft key to change this display When in this display you may select the time display settings To make your selection press the Set Time soft key adjust the hours and minutes using the up and down soft keys select AM or PM select 12 hr or 24 hr followed by pressing the arrow back soft key when all selections are complete e Show Time Status Press the Show Time Status soft key to change this display When in this display you may turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar To change the Show Time Status setting press and release the On or Off soft key followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Sync Time Press the Sync Time soft key to change this display When in this display you may automatically have the radio set
13. This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump start
14. VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2010 Chrysler Group LLC o m O REEDE e e Ls Le INTRODUCTION sit ees Be
15. or Dial 248 555 1212 Voice Activated Features e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the e Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming user s authority to operate the equipment SMS messages e This device may not cause harmful interference e Hands Free text messaging Send a message to John Smiths Mobile e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired e Redialing last dialed numbers Redial operation e Calling Back the last incoming call number Call UCONNECT TOUCH 8 4 8 4 Nav Back Uconnect Phone e View Call logs on screen Show incoming calls Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in Show Outgoing calls Show missed Calls Show vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al Recent Calls lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie e Searching Contacts phone number Search for John NOTE Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging Smith Mobile Screen Activated Features Dialing via Keypad using touch screen Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis played on the touch screen Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs Reviewi
16. 3 6L Engine Only W Vehicle Loading sees 417 ET wees un O Vehicle Certification Label 417 O E 85 General Information 411 4 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 417 D Ethanol Fuel E 85 000 412 4 Gross Axle Weight Rating CAWR A17 s MEE ie EE Verlos ne ours qos cn SUP ACE exce dor MI 418 Rer dbi dde E OLoading 55 ee 418 Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles 413 OStarting eee A14 Mier TOWNE on voce is e dE e a ear De d 419 T Cruising Range cse A14 O Common Towing Definitions 419 D Replacement Parts lisse A14 O Trailer Hitch Classification 422 O Maintenance us x epo RR AREA RO PRESA 414 END Oven cle ME anes Weight RAUNGS auae mesi cde oes oranes 423 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 O Trailer And Tongue Weight 424 W Recreational Towing Spying Red bemenis euro ruote pen ones 425 Behind Motorhome Etc 432 O Two Wheel Drive And All Wheel Drive 432 HTowine DS ux uos deo aC PERDE Xr 430 346 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id STARTING PROCEDURES CAUTION Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat ing precautions are not observed belts e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to shih i
17. 6 Air Outlet 7 ESC Off Switch 13 Engine Start Stop Button 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Uconnect Touch System Hard Controls 14 Trunk Release Button 3 Hazard Switch 9 SD Memory Card Slot 15 Dimmer Controls 4 Uconnect Touch System 10 Power Outlet 16 Hood Release 5 Climate Control Hard Controls 11 CD DVD Slot 17 Headlight Switch 6 Glove Compartment 12 Storage Compartment 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 040336120 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator 2 AWD All Wheel Drive Indicator The AWD indicator will illuminate when All Wheel Drive AWD is activated 3 Position Light Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park 0Q lights or headlights are turned on 4 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 5 Turn Signal Indicators Ca The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about 1 mile 1 6 km with the turn signals on a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off I
18. B Jump Starting Procedures O Preparations For Jump Start B Jump Starting Procedure Mi Freeing A Stuck Vehicle B Shift Lever Override o With Keyless Enter N Go If Equipped 453 B Towing A Disabled Vehicle 453 O Without The Ignition Key 455 434 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch bank near the top center of the instrument panel Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed
19. Beatrice Adams Listen Y 11 Sanjiv Prabaker Listen 10 Lin Ford Listen bj 9 Jay Kay Listen Once a message is received and viewed or listened to you will have the following options Read Messages e Send a Reply If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message e Call e Forward 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Send Messages Using Soft Keys 68 4 7 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 ou 72 You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send Messaging gt New Messag X a new message nbox 1 Yes e Touch the Phone soft key 2 No 3 Call me e Touch the messaging soft key then new message 4 Need directions e Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person 5 I ll be there in XX minutes you wish to send the message to 6 Okay e If multiple numbers are available for the contact select which number you would like to have the message sent e Press Send or Cancel N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Send Messages Using Voice Commands 68 a FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 ou e Press the S button Neuen bi i 1 Yes e After the Listening prompt and the following beep nu TET 2 No say Send message to John Smith mobile 3 Call me e After the system prompts you for what message you 4 Need directions want to send say the message you wish
20. DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL message and a new DTE value will display Miles Per Gallon MPG The Miles Per Gallon MPG feature displays instanta neous fuel economy in a bar graph below the DTE this function cannot be reset Press the BACK button to return to the main menu Vehicle Speed Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Speed displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the SELECT button to display the current speed in mph or km h Pressing the SELECT button a second time will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km h NOTE Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the EVIC 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Trip Info
21. Example T145 80D18 103M T 5 Temporary Spare Tire NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 389 Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare
22. NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e f your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 435 e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum WARNING heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a You or others can be badly burned by hot engine supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If from the engine cooling system you see or hear steam coming from under the hood tAUHON do not open the hood until the radiator has had time CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service 436 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Continued e The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close
23. Power Locks Driver Door 500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Pink Pare een ow gt Hm 3 z Yellow strument Panel amp 2 Power Outlet Con Red tor e jue ss mp ee Green 1 Fuse Spare 53 ux een 15 Fuse Spare 3 1 Fuse Spare 29 Fuse Spare 33 2 Fue Spae OR Fue Spare NEN sole Rear 26 a 25 Amp Amplifier Natural 1 25 Amp _ Power Seats Natural 2 15 Amp HVAC Module Blue Cluster 15 Amp Ignition Switch Blue Wireless Module 10 Amp Steering Column MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Red Module Clock BEN 15 Amp Cluster Rearview 35 10 Amp Battery Sensor Blue Mirror Compass Red 46 10 Amp Adaptive Cruise 36 Ged Control 20 Amp Active Suspension Yellow 4 Fuse Spare Fuse Spare Mt Ma ME EN EE j 42 30 Amp Rear Defrost 5l 20 Amp Front Heated Seats Pink Yellow 43 25 Amp Rear Heated Seats 52 10 Amp Heated Natural Steering Wheel Red Cupholders Rear 44 10 Amp Park Assist Blind e Seat Red Spot Camera MEUS 36 37 15 Amp Radio 47 10 Amp _ Adaptive Front Blue Red __ Lighting 38 20 Amp _ Power Outlet In 48 Eu Yellow side Arm Rest LX q
24. Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Trip Info displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press and release the UP DOWN but tons until one of the following Trip functions displays in the EVIC e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the ON RUN position To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and hold the SELECT button for two seconds Current display will reset along with other functions N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 Units Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Units displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press an
25. down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Reset Auto Up Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up 1 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the passenger doors To disable the window controls press and release the window lockout button setting it in the DOWN position To enable the window controls press and release the window lockout button again setting it in the UP position 021935321 Window Lockout Switch Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a
26. e Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes e The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate When the Hl level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal Hl level If the HlI level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LO level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LO level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 Manual Seats If Equipped Forward Or Rearward Adjustment The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat near the floor Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear ward Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired Using body pressure move forward and rear ward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched Manual Seat Adjusting Bar 030934979 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Recline To adjust the seatback lift the le
27. o Windshield Washers seus 199 A Mist FOUTE oos 3 sso ee Shee UE HER RAD i 199 o Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only 199 O Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 200 W Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 201 ll Power Tilt Telescoping Steering Column If I o ijo ERAS RE CC P 202 ll Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped 203 W Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 204 ll Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 206 E Oo NALE soe ARE EDE Soh RAS cae eee 207 o To Set A Desired Speed uiu scant 9 8 eu eo ee ES 207 A lo Deaelival s eoe xp ER SR RR seeds 207 O To Resume Speed 4 vive a Ra RS Ru 208 o To Vary The Speed Setting 208 H To Accelerate For Passing esso n 208 ll Adaptive Cruise Control ACC lee bies ORE PONS EE RR IE Per E 209 D Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation 212 D Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC 212 ATOA EE weed te AIR Coe ee BAAS EE 213 o To Set A Desired ACC Speed 2354262 dee 214 E TOE BHO ours Seca tae ESOS IHE S od e Ru MR 215 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 O To Turn Off o To Resume Speed o To Vary The Speed Setting O Setting The Following Distance In ACC O Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu o Display Warnings And Maintenance O Precautions While Driving With ACC O General Information O Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode B Forward Col
28. or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie SAFETY TIPS WARNING Continued Transporting Passengers e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO using a seat belt properly AREA EE Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They c
29. recur Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible AUTOSTICK AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situa tions Operation When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between the five available gears To engage AutoStick simply move the shift lever to the right or left D D while in the DRIVE position When AutoStick is active the current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster In AutoStick mode the transmission will only shift up and down when right or left is manually 358 STARTING AND OPERATING M selected by the driver or as described below It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen Fully pressing the accelerator pedal while in Autostick mode will downshift the transmission as needed for maximum acceleration 3 6L Models Only The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear T
30. required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is corr
31. vehicle distance is detected Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead Always be aware which mode is selected To Set A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired press the SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 NOTE You must observe the display when setting or changing speed not the speedometer To Vary The Speed Setting There are two ways to change the set speed e Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the desired speed and press the SET button e Tap the RES or SET button to increase or decrease the set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments respec tively Hold the RES or SET button for 5 mph 8 km h increments To Cancel The system will disable normal Cruise Control without erasing the memory if e You softly tap or depress the brake pedal e You press the CANCEL button e The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates To Resume Press the RES button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if e You push and release the ON OFF button e You turn off the ignition e You switch off ESC If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated the system will return to the last driver setting A
32. while the wheel is still on the ground 4 Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange Hinr WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 441 Front Jacking Location 442 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts wheel cover if equipped and tire Remove the cover by hand Do not pry it off 7 Mount the spare tire 060536875 NOTE For vehicles equipped with a center cap or Rear Jacking Location wheel cover do not attempt to install it on the compact 5 Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire spare However when reinstalling the road tire follow and install the spare tire the procedure under Wheel Cover Or Center Cap Instal lation in place of the remaining steps in this procedure N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 443 8 Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not fully tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 9 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jac
33. wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Emergency And Towing Assistance The 911 Help numbers can only be altered These can not be deleted or the names can not be changed To change the 911 Help number follow these steps e Touch the phonebook soft key from the Phone main screen e Touch the 911 Help soft key Touch the appropriate listing to alter Emergency for example e Once Emergency is touched the Edit soft key appears Touch the Edit soft key and you will be given the choice to Edit Number or Reset to Default N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 e Follow the on screen prompts to complete the task Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s ar
34. 000 miles 169 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481 Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is opera
35. 79 WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap NOTE e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap 022637851 Adjustable Headrest Downward Position e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions
36. Bulb fascia 2 Socket 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly aad 5 Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia and then install 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly the screws install the replacement bulb NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507 FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate All Engines 19 Gallons Engine Oil with Filter 3 6 Liter Engine SAE 5W 30 API Certified 5 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified Cooling System 3 6 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile 10 Quarts 9 5 Liters Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System MOPAR 14 5 Quarts 13 9 Liters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System MOPAR 15 Quarts 14 3 Liters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 3 6L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 5 7L Engine Use API Certi
37. DO IN EMERGENCIES SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Firmly set the parking brake 2 Remove the rubber tray from the storage bin located to the right of the shift lever The override access port is near the bottom of the bin to the right of the shift lever gate 3 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position without starting the engine 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Using a screwdriver or similar tool press and hold the override tab through the access port on the center con sole 051210780 Shift Lever Override 6 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 8 Reinstall the rubber tray into the storage bin N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 453 With Keyless Enter N Go If Equipped STOP button once or twice to go to the ON RUN If the engine is running press the START STOP button to position Do not start the engine Then follow the in turn it off Release the brake pedal and press the START structions shown above to activate the override TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground RWD MODELS AWD MODELS IF Transmission is oper Flat Tow able e Trans in NEUTRAL e 30 mph 48 km h max speed tance Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent mand
38. Distance button and release Each time the button is pressed the distance setting adjusts between long medium and short If there is no vehicle ahead the vehicle will maintain the set speed If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane the EVIC displays the Sensed Vehicle Indi cator icon and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto matically to maintain the distance setting regardless of the set speed The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until e The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed e The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor e The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph 24 km h and the system automatically disengages itself N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 e The distance setting is changed e The system disengages Refer to the information on ACC Activation The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited how ever the driver can always apply the brakes manually if necessary NOTE The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance If this occurs a visual alert BRAKE will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity When this occurs you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain
39. Doors 1st Press Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob present in the vehicle 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected outside the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically un locks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle To Enter The Trunk With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the deck lid press the button on the right side of CHMSL Center High Mounted Stop Light which is located on the deck lid NOTE If you inadvertently leave your vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the deck lid the deck lid will automatically unlatch unless another one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmit ters is
40. Driver Door 1st Press is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if Driver Door 1st Press is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If driver door EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 first is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter e Memory Linked to FOB Press the Memory Linked to FOB soft key to change this display This feature provides automatic driver seat po sitioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press the Memory Linked to FOB soft key select ON or OFF followed by pressing the arrow back soft key NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Passive Entry Keyless Enter N Go Press the Passive Entry soft key to change this display This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection press the Passive Entry soft key select ON or OFF followed by pressing the arrow back soft key Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in T
41. ETT 488 509 MOENIE uogae caes quos eunt bug rts ud 488 Tan MGSO eae geh et podes E REY AR PRISE 486 Automatic 66 038 coe a wee oe acm 350 353 486 Ee oa Guat aedium e ed es ee ge ee eae 509 Reece hare ie ie a 2 sco sac p aes Be ON 354 lulii soos ai ARE Bey Sachs Skee SEE 350 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry iiw 93 Eos 25 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry isi v E ER EP RES 20 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 246 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Transporting Pets 22242204208 Ib SOR weed Eden 83 N INDEX 557 Tread Wear Indicators creen 391 Tp Odometer tn 274 Trunk Lid Deck Lid iun BREER ESE 39 40 Trunk Release Remote Control 39 Trunk Release Emergency x axe 9 hx En 40 Ttt onde 54226064 646 DRR sog HEAD Ki 193 273 UCI Connector send RU wh dre REEG A RE 324 Uniform Tue Quality Grades ae oe va yop pP S ves DoD Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 324 Universal Transmitter 54 2 zs x es 246 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 48 Mari IMHEEOLS 2 acea ge hus HR ER AH ae 100 Vehicle Certification Label 417 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 4245440425 4639 4 494 e 381 417 418 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vecie Oit Ee Goon ae RES Hoe we ee d 339 503 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 Viscosity Enelne Od peregra senri eg RR DE 466 46
42. Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffe
43. If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as 390 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck WARNING your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failu
44. Miles 234 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service schedule 136 000 Miles 221 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 136 000 miles 221 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer m d Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 144 000 miles 234 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive AWD change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 526 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 152 000 Miles 247 000 km or t This mai
45. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 386 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low NS 1AH TING A
46. Schedule d d Odometer Reading Repair Order Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 120 000 miles 195 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s Replace the accessory drive belt s Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front axle fluid All Wheel Drive AWD Date Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 128 000 Miles 208 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule m d Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 128 000 miles 208 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing AII Wheel Drive AWD Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 525 144 000
47. TCS off e You turn OFF the ignition ESC will automatically be re engaged To Resume Speed Press the RES button and release Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed Adaptive NOTE You can resume ACC from a minimum of Cruise Control 20 mph 32 km h WARNING Cancelled 96789 mi The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit Resuming a set speed 03243400 that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation This could cause a collision and or serious injury Adaptive Cruise Control Cancelled To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if e You push and release the ON OFF button NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 To Vary The Speed Setting While ACC is set you can increase the set speed by pressing and holding the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to in crease in 5 mph 8 km h increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h While ACC is set the set speed can be decreased by pressing and holding the SET button If t
48. The Features Of Your Vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 EVIC Amber Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell tales These telltales include e Forward Collision Warning FCW OFF FCW This light warns the driver of a potential colli sion with the vehicle in front of you and OFF prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the collision For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator this light will turn on to indicate the wind ye shield washer fluid is low EVIC Red Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These telltales include a ar e Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or i more door may be ajar e Oil Pressure Warning Light qm This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engin
49. Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Starting Voice Recognition VR Session in Disc Radio Player Modes To switch to the disc mode say Change source to Disc In this mode you can say the following commands This command can be given in any mode or screen NOTE The commands can be said on any screen when e Track to change the track a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect Voice Command Sve button UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Voice Tree Uconnect Voice Command AM FM Satellite Radio available commands These commands can be spoken when the AM FM or Satellite radio is playing after pushing the Uconnect voice command button Commands only available Commands available in Commands only available in AM FM mode mode in Satellite mode 3 Audio will Audio will Audio will Audio will Audio will change to 950 change to the change to the change to change to AM AM or FM next Satellite Satellite station Satellite frequency or Rock Stations 80 s on 8 Channel 8 Satellite Channel stored in preset 5 Notes 1 You can replace 950 AM with any other AM or FM frequency such as 98 7 FM 2 You can replace Rock with any of the satellite music types 3 You c
50. Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 423 6343 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 531 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contra
51. a safe distance from the vehicle ahead w S 032433102 Brake Alert Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings The EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer The information it displays depends on ACC system status 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Press the MENU button located on the steer ACC SET ing wheel repeatedly until one of the follow ing displays in the EVIC When ACC is set the set speed will display Menu The set speed will continue to display in place of the Button odometer reading when changing the EVIC display while ACC is set Adaptive Cruise Control Off o When ACC is deactivated the display will read NE 83 F Adaptive Cruise Control Off Adaptive Cruise Control Ready WMUZ The Light When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting The Afters has not been selected the display will read Adaptive He Lives Cruise Control Ready 032433431 Example Only N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC Display Warnings And Maintenance activity occurs which may include any of the following Set Speed Change Distance Setting Change System Cancel Driver Override System Off ACC Proximity Warning ACC Unavailable Warning The EVIC will return to the last display selected after five seconds of
52. accident The belt forces allow the belt to retract fully won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but WARNING across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt will not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage then move it up or down to the position that fits you best 022636634 Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lowe
53. allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result 034134074 Power Sunroof Switch 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE E Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect
54. available commands press the Uconnect Voice Command vr button and say Help You will hear available commands for the screen displayed N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 Natural Speech Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Push To Talk PTT button Uconnect Voice Commands The Uconnect Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are avail able at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect Voice Command eve button Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command SVR button 2 Say a command e g Help 3
55. avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear range or vehicle speed when road conditions and RPM level allows Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily 432 STARTING AND OPERATING ee RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Two Wheel Drive and All Wheel Drive Recreational towing with all four wheels on the ground or using a tow dolly is NOT ALLOWED The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle behind an other vehicle is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS N Hazard Warning Flashers 434 B If Your Engine Overheats 434 N Jacking And Tire Changing 436 O Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage 436 O Preparations For Jacking 438 O Jacking And Changing A Tire 439 3 Wheel Cover Or Center Cap Installation If PQUIDDEC ou 2244 hue ee x6 ooo P RN Pd 444 BC om pach opare Messire EE eens timi 446
56. blocked by other structures or vehicles the system will not be able to alert the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including reducing the radio volume WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using RCP Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before back ing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Modes Of Operation Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Blind Spot Alert When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object However when the system is operating in RCP the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio volume is reduced Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro priate side view mirror based on a detected obje
57. brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximate
58. can increase the risk of injury in an accident Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers In addition the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column 022635326 Advanced Front Airbag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Ad 2 Knee Bolster vanced Front Airbags 3 Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon seat posit
59. command into two voice commands Search Contact and when asked John Smith Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Natural Speech Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition VR engine Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly omith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Push To Talk PTT button Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep To activate the Uconnect Phone from id
60. contains fuses and relays wm 072710829 Integrated Power Module MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495 CAUTION Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse e When installing the integrated power module 1 cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop pe Radiator lon i erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so ELE po emen may allow water to get into the integrated power Power Steering 1 module and possibly result in an electrical system poe qm When replacing a blown fuse it is important to Pink may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Fuse Spare Fuse Spare Fuse Spare 20 Amp All Wheel Drive Yellow Module If Equipped 10 Amp use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating Auc cd Has The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated os ee 496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Lo Rd I EEN R MEE Yellow i Red Clutch Pue Spae e me us __ Fuse Spare Natural Natural Natural Blue Shifter Fuse Spare Red Radiator Fan 2 25 Amp Engine Module Natural 50 Amp EU Power Steering 2 Headlamp Washers Red ESAE a 25 Amp MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity C
61. d eR 292 Gasoline Clean Air eee 408 Gasoline Reformulated 408 Gauges Coolant TIemperatule 2s dex ER RI tai 281 ll P HEES AE OE EE OOS OK 278 Dpeedomelef sae ETES ERA EE RD Ed 278 TC NOMEE 544548055855 555548 re S DE 2 9 ec cu sa nee ee Gee bee Hens RR sa 354 Gear Select Lever Ovemnde is ss sacs RAAR HD 452 General Information 17 24 131 163 228 406 General Maintenance ia acc ore 9 SURE ERA esa 464 Glass CANS PPP KOR BROER YS 493 Gross Axle Weight Rating 417 420 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 417 419 BT EE OT EE ET N N A17 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water osx aom 8 ws ox 360 Hazard Warme Flasher 232a sour eg titti 434 Head Resttainis ia n or aoe one eR 3C Se RP ges Headlight Washers Heade MERE age oa Ed PERSPSER REPE ORGIE 23492220 EER EE eee TER AES Bulb Replacement 546 INDEX M Cleanin OE DLE ELE ETA OR EQ 492 Delay peeve ee Gene KAROO EA eee EED 191 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 194 Lights Oit Reminder 46 4 dios pci n ao 192 CD Witi Wipers pica xa Edd p S EU 190 199 PASSING P ab eee eee Pree de H 194 S 4 442 oe eas he whee ee URGE A m NA 189 diie Del ase ENE DER OER ORE ee 191 Washers Locura se dees yerek Ee betes a ea 475 Heated Mirrors 0 SS SS se 100 Heated Be STE ecb edd oe CU ee eee ha 174 Heater Engine Block 24 5 22 44645564 Gave es 350 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Sw
62. dealer 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE E Service ACC Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor it indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor 96789 mi ACC FCW Unavailable Warning 032433104 Precautions While Driving With ACC In certain driving situations ACC may have detection issues In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpect edly The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene Adding A Trailer Hitch The weight of a trailer hitch may affect the performance of ACC If there is a noticeable change in performance following the installation of a trailer hitch or if the ACC performance does not return to normal after removing the trailer hitch see your authorized dealer Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly Turns And Bends In turns or bends ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too late or too early This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly Give extra attention in curves and be ready to apply the b
63. deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave Shallow Standing Water effects Although your vehicle is capable of driving through Continued shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so 362 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION Continued WARNING e Driving through standing water may cause dam e Driving through standing water limits your vehi age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when drivin
64. drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze solution Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Selection of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE xe CAUTION CAUTION Continued e This vehicle has not been designed for use with e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the propylene glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 104
65. engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing e Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi see tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information e Transmission Temperature Warning Light with severe usage such as trailer towing If this run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off This light indicates that the transmission fluid light turns on safely pull over and stop the CAUTION temperature is running hot This may occur vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated wi
66. everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Continued your injuries in an accident much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the front seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap a Pulling Out the Lap Shoulder Belt Latch Plate 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could mo
67. exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belts The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR to secure a Child Restraint System CRS These types of seatbelts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode The chart below defines the seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Duver Center ET through the belt path of the child restraint Slide the latch EN CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock plate into the buckle until you hear a click Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor As the belt Io retracts you will hear a ratcheting sound This indicates e N A Not Applicable the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR will loosen with
68. for headlight parking light and instrument panel light operation Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF To turn the automatic system off move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the automatic mode Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information SmartBeam If Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle spe cific light and a
69. fully until the vehicle is lowered to 5 L valve Notch 5 Mounting Stud the ground 3 Wheel Lug Nut N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 445 3 Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel Install the cover by hand snapping the cover over the two lug nuts Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover 4 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground 5 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 6 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft lb 135 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 7 For vehicles equipped with center caps install the center cap by hand Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the center cap 8 Stow the jack tools and spare tire Make sure the base of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow th
70. glass 13 SYNC Press the Sync soft key to toggle the Sync feature On Off The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature 14 Temperature Control Manual Temperature Control Only Press the temperature soft key to regulate the tempera ture of the air inside the passenger compartment Moving the temperature bar into the red area indicates warmer temperatures Moving the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Climate Control Functions A C Air Conditioning The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When the air conditioning system is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin For improved fuel economy press the A C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings NOTE e For Manual Climate Controls if the system is in Mix Floor or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows e If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed e If your air conditioning performance
71. in the event of a collision 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head NOTE The head restraints should only be removed by restraint To lower the head restraint press the push qualified technicians for service purposes only If either button located at the base of the head restraint and push of the head restraints require removal see your autho downward on the head restraint rized dealer WARNING Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death dem 030907490 Push Button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 Rear Head Restraints The center rear head restraint has two positions up or down When the seat is being occupied the head restraint should raised When there are no occupants in the center seat position the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the driver To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Push Button NOTE The outboard head restraints are not adjustable Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve
72. involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately 478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam Cooling System age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition WARNING when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis motion connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the v
73. key or the amp button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automati cally This is cell phone dependent Redial e Press the Redial soft key e or press the amp button and after the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone Uconnect Phone Features Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows Press the amp button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Emergency an
74. limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale 420 STARTING AND OPERATING xe Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle
75. mph 0 km h Door Lock System h To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Open the rear door Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and further information rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exitfeature 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door in accordance with local laws THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 021835328 021835329 Child Protection Door Lock Location Child Protection Door Lock Function WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock knob up unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle KEYLESS ENTER N GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons NOTE e Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has be
76. n ER WK RE eae ea ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING sesse ss see sesse TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENTS B Introduction B How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Modifications Alterations INTRODUCTION Mi Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION See INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high guality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acguaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your Satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Con
77. no ACC display activity Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle Warning The ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning will display when conditions temporarily limit system performance This most often occurs at times of poor visibility such as in snow or heavy rain The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions such as mud dirt or ice In these cases the EVIC will display Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle and the system will deactivate 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas i e tunnels with reflective tiles or ice and snow The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas Under rare conditions when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur Clean Radar Sensor in Front of Vehicle FCW OFF Clean Radar Sensor Warning 032433103 NOTE If the ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning is active Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section If weather conditions are not a factor the driver should examine the sensor It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower gr
78. normal operating range 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an autho rized dealership for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster N NE aat Trip A 0 0mi Tire PSI Vehicle Info System Setup 56789 mi 041035317 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following Radio Info Fuel Economy Vehicle Speed Trip Info Tire Pressure Vehic
79. of the following components correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light e Four TPM sensors and e TPM Telltale Light e Receiver module 400 STARTING AND OPERATING M The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings IN The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster a LOW TIRE message will be displayed and a chime will sound when tire pres sure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Service TPMS Warning If
80. oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 56 000 miles 91 000 km M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 519 64 000 Miles 104 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule O C C C O L L L L L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 64 000 miles 104 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing All Wheel Drive AWD Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 520 MAIN
81. or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go e When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver s seat will move about 2 4 in 60 mm rearward if the driver s seat position is greater than or equal to 2 7 in 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN position When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver s seat will move to a position 0 3 in 7 7 mm forward of the rear stop if the driver s seat position is between 0 9 in and 2 7 in 22 7 mm and 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition in the ACC or RUN position NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 e The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver s seat position is less than 0 9 in 22 7 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument
82. outside the vehicle and within 3 ft 1 0 m of the deck lid To Lock The Vehicle s Doors With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door handles press the door handle LOCK button to lock both doors Outside Door Handle Lock Button 021836569 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 NOTE e After pressing the door handle LOCK button you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either passive entry door handle This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking e The passive entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door control all the door windows 021935320 Power Window Switches There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position NOTE For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect Touch the power window switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is cycled to the OFF
83. paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove 490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Special Care Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e f you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month piod Rib Vd ies Rm power ou ng e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges finish y 5 P of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open CAUTION e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the pain
84. parking brake firmly and set an automatic the right front tire block the left rear transmission in PARK a manual transmission in ut cum wheel REVERSE jm i RN us x E T i HERF LULT TERT i N p M i TT N HT a RON LAG Rar Continued 440 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Continued e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack 1 Remove the spare tire jack and lug wrench Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic 2 If equipped with steel wheels do not remove the wheel cover at this time If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts use the lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle WARNING Cpu To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with the metal edges Jack Warning Label l and retention teeth 3 Before raising the vehicle use the lug wrench to loosen but not remove the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn
85. phonebook entry you wish to send The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e The first number encountered for that contact will be sent All other numbers entered for that contact will be ignored e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature e Pauses wait or other characters that are supported by some phones are not supported over Bluetooth These additional symbols will be ignored in the dial ing a numbered sequence 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Barge In Overriding Prompts The vr button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command imme diately For example if a prompt is asking There are 2 numbers with the name John Say the full name you could press the VR button and say John Smith to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Voice Response Length It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed Voice Response Length e Touch the More hard key then touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Display soft key then scroll down to Voice Response Length e Select either Brief or Detailed by touching the box next to the selectio
86. phones are not supported over Bluetooth These additional symbols will be ignored in the dial ing a numbered sequence Barge In Overriding Prompts The vr button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command imme diately For example if a prompt is asking There are 2 numbers with the name John Say the full name you could press the VR button and say John Smith to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Voice Response Length It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed Voice Response Length e Touch the More soft key then touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Display soft key then scroll down to Voice Response Length e Select either Brief or Detailed by touching the box next to the selection A check mark will appear to show your selection Phone And Network Status Indicators Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength and phone battery strength Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a num
87. placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Tire Placard Location ee STARTING AND OPERATING 381 Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard
88. select a lower gear range using the Autostick shift control NOTE Selecting a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min utes of continuous operation then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter according to the interval specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer tow ing Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals ee STARTING AND OPERATING 431 Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency AutoStick By using the AutoStick mode and selecting a specific gear range frequent shifting can be avoided The highest gear range should be selected that allows for adequate performance For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation A reduction in vehicle speed may be required to
89. selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HI level If the HlI level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LO level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HI to LO indicating the change The LO level setting will turn OFF automati cally after a maximum of 45 minutes 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Rear Heated Seats On some models the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats The heated seat switches for these seats are located on the rear of the center console There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently You can choose from HI LO or OFF heat settings Amber indica tor lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI one for LO and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HI level heating Press the switch a second time to select LO level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF ay NOTE
90. soft key from the CU SUE MIO ED RR OORHANG 54 od Gel ME Uconnect Phone main screen e Touch the Add Device soft key No phone connected e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth youc you lie topar a hones enabled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen e See step 4 to complete the process 4 Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 10 10 NW 54 out 68 af tP FM 91 7 Wp 72 Bluetooth pairing in progress Please wait 5 When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range Pair Additional Mobile Phones e Touch the More soft key to begin e Touch the Settings soft key e Next touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Touch the Add Device soft key e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen e Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting e When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Sel
91. some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down SMS Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth in order to use this feature If the Uconnect Phone determines your phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over Bluetooth the Messaging button will be greyed out and the feature will not be available for use N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 NOTE Uconnect Phone SMS is only available when RRS 40 10 Nw Ba the vehicle is not in moving out 68 od FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 ow James Butler 9 39 am 12 08 08 Hey Bill am on my way to work Let me know if you have Messaging nbo TUR Pd 14 James Butler Listen New Ed 13 248 576 5459 Listen wane PH 12
92. such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system Continued NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 411 Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued WARNING e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L ENGINE ONLY IF kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as EQUIPPED ra a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the E 85 General Information vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve running for more than a short period adjust the hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique ventilation system to force fresh outside air into fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un the vehicle leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those su
93. that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an accident These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in an accident Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed airbag must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seatbelts This feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seatbelts are fastened BeltAlert triggers within 60 seconds of vehicle speed over 5 mph 8 km h The reminder sequence lasts 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie for 96 seconds or until the respective seatbelts are fas tened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Re minder Light remains illuminated until front belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten
94. the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion 398 STARTING AND OPERATING M For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system Operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarke
95. the SABIC is located should re Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC main free from any obstructions NOTE Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Continued e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment e Being too close to the SAB and SABIC airbags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued e If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag provides enhanced protection and works together with the Driver Advanced Front Airbag during a frontal impact Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbags Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Airbags work with the Supplemental Dr
96. the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on accident This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in accidents Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices
97. the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet park ing 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020235340 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up Ignition Or Accessory On Message Opening the driver s door when the ignition is in ACC or ON engine not running a chime will sound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF In addition to the chime the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster NOTE With the Uconnect Touch system the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the ignition in the ACC or RUN position A child could operate power windows other con
98. to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The NOTE Refer to the Compact Spare Tire section of vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You Tires General Information in Starting And Operating could be crushed Never put any part of your body for information about the spare tire its use and opera under a vehicle that is on a jack tion Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access a lift cover in the trunk Follow these steps to access the jack Continued and spare tire lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage NOTE The spare tire must be removed in order to access the jack WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 437 1 Open the trunk 3 Remove the fastener securing the spare tire 2 Lift the access cover using the pull strap and hook Place the hook over the edge of the rear window to secure the cover 060535619 Spare Tire Fastener Opening The Access Panel 438 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 4 Remove the spare tire WARNING 5 Remove the fastener securing the jack l
99. to return to the previous menu e Show Time in Status Bar When in this display you may turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar To change the Show Time Status setting press the Show Time in Status Bar soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Safety Assistance After pressing the Safety Assistance soft key the fol lowing settings will be available 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Front Collision Sensitivity The Front Collision Warning FCW feature can be can be set to Far set to Near or turned Off The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This allows for a more dynamic driving experience To change FCW status press and release the Off Near or Far button followed by pressing the arrow back soft key For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Park Assist The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE VERSE a
100. to send or say 5 I ll be there in XX minutes List There are 18 preset messages 6 Okay While the list of defined messages are being read you can interrupt the system by pressing the VR button and saying the message you want to send l List of Preset Messages After the system confirms that you want to send your message to John Smith your message will be sent Lgs 2 No 3 Okay 4 I can t talk right now 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M D 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 i5 16 17 Call me I ll call you later I m on my way Thanks I ll be late I will be number minutes late See you in number minutes Stuck in traffic Start without me Where are you Are you there yet I need directions I m lost 18 See you later Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone OFF ON Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 Voice Tree Uconnect Hands Free Calling Uconnect Hands Free Calling The commands can be spoken from any screen after pushing the Uco
101. x eieasrde acit e n 27 O Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 48 Power Door TOSS a cse rai EXE RY ES 28 O Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 49 o Child Protection Door Lock System Rear H Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR Ivo A P rr 30 I HaulDDed 222 Pd px xU ERE CL PER SI 49 W Keyless EntemN Go lt 4 s0n adacsgers cr ne 92 O Energy Management Feature 252i 50 MVVINGOWS ues sous euh EE d ERR 36 El eat Belt PretenSionerS oi ad RR ep ds 51 O Power WindOWS sasa seedade e iaia d 36 O Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System diu P 51 N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 O Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 59 ale i ea a ee EE ae eee 84 Seal Belt Extender a 2 3 9 ae Does a ED EE 63 EH Transporune Passengers sce soe m icem e 84 D Supplemental Restraint System SRS Hd died ia ea seas ES RE Game ne de ane 84 I AUIDO S 276 gia oye PERRA Suae HORE 54 4 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The o Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 62 bh san EER DRR IE Ra DEd SE DE 85 D Event Data Recorder EDR aaan 70 O Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make 5 Child Restraints 0 0 eee ee 71 dee EE id ll Engine Break In Recommendations 83 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Keyless Ignition No
102. 0 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The EVIC display will change from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for
103. 05 El PackUp LAMPS oe oi vare quei dct iat eyed 506 Eilicense amp a 224 DERE RE Ge Shs hess 506 Brod Capacities 22e pees kiaii 507 B Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 508 minio PTT ip ER ORR DE 508 sa MAER t E EE OE ON 509 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 9 T a EE 4 m Tm I so Mw 074438716 5 Air Cleaner Filter 6 Engine Oil Fill 7 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 8 Washer Fluid Reservoir 1 Integrated Power Module Fuses 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 4 Engine Coolant Reservoir 460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L O 6 5 o eremo 1 Integrated Power Module Fuses 5 Engine Oil Fill 2 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 6 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 4 Air Cleaner Filter 8 Washer Fluid Reservoir N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these sys
104. 10 mph 16 km h ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status Rear Park Assist Display 032737807 Rear Park Assist OFF 032737803 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a one half second tone As the vehicle moves clos
105. 1991 EE STARTING AND OPERATING 379 Tire Terminology and Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure 380 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location gt a aj EN ox NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS on the driver s side B Pillar NEVEREXCEED XXX XNX ies 2 3 SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This
106. 3 DOOL ooi ARE ER ORDER 2 7 Memos Seal qu va oe BAAR RoE RS Ri EE es 183 ower DUO si bed SEER RA RAD d UE A 28 Memory Seats and Radio uc a dope ache tad WERE n 183 Low Tire Pressure System se se se se se pU NM IROL miss ee don oe rec BE HER ie DERE 408 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Wintel Computer issues up N RA DERDES ea 294 LATCH MEAT NEE ESE 9899 745x9 IOA MIMO oe at bin aes a ARE PIE ESTESA 96 L Drication Body a 0 eevoeaueaee PAR RD ao as 474 Compass Tempetatul v dv uci voe v Ver epa as 96 Elec Poweted 22209444 REDES re dcs Ro EE 99 Maintenance Free Battery aire DU es e ge i mss 469 EIGOIPIC REMO au dc ome Ten toe BS de im dete dan 29 Maintenance Procedures a ua cac Rr Res 464 Exterior Folding e aou she RR FRA ERES 98 Maintenance Schedule comm at oe eee dees 512 ln i ON EE EE OE as 100 Maintenance General SS SS 464 OUISIGR AE AR ER N UR ten FESS dU d 07 Maintenance Sunroof leen 255 Rearview ees 96 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 276462 Vanity lees 100 Manual Transmission llle 488 Mode Puid Level Check 246s 23 ADD EER 488 Fuel MEE C 292 Manual Service o lt 2 4 3 904 4584464445 25 09 ES 533 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 10 550 INDEX NEE Id Monitor Tire Pressure System 22229 ERES 397 MOPAR Accessories leen 463 532 MEDE ETDE birret 9X eee eh ES OTRE EES 408 Multi Displacement Engine Syst
107. 3 6 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 377 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Loa
108. 44 bene i 325 Iur P 54 Lane Change and Turn Signals 193 Lane Change Assist sae vende ha eS RR ai 194 apy Snoulder Bel sosio estrit 843 0 5 42 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 2e mr RR 10 17 Lateh Plate 2434264565555 oe ES eet ee ERES 44 I ii cca oo 644 Bede E ee eb Re 88 HOOL AA TR AREAS ER EE NT 3 188 Lead Free Gasoline 0000004 407 Leaks Fluid Shoe ORE vk oe ee ek oe 2 ee 88 bier TES si imuereccce4 x sesdbE EER Eb 391 Le BE DUIS suc oce eee cease ce APA AAS ol 87 503 Ero 87 189 ide E oye wee 63 64 69 85 279 PW MR T AR oben oa EE EE ere oe Red 279 Es moo meth wakes S46 ows kone EN 274 Atitomatie Headlighis 4 sws socra sasaaa b rn 190 Brake Assist Warning 005 373 Brake Warming 24 i skr ge oe dct d BOR S ES 279 bulb Replacement 42323 2 32 Rep xa hes 503 504 Contes Red 4245522 caus dE SU ES 244 Daytime RUNN 29 299 EE PEER GE tess 192 Dimmer Switch Headlight 193 194 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 373 EXULIOE 525 5h 0598 RS EER eet IE 87 FOS P ER RAD RR engine ee es 192 273 Hazard Warming Flasher 243 ode semet 434 Headlight WEE 6 42 uri ordo erp Rem t 189 Headighis cse o e x eoe d te ean soem S EU 189 505 Headlights On Reminder 412532 v ees 192 Headlights On With Wipers 190 199 High Bed 24 da dotsacuo ne Ghee T ERREUR 194 High Beam Mdicatot cca ae sexe P eee a Tes 2 9 High Beam Low Beam Select
109. 66 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING WARNING Continued e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Continued NS 1AH TING AND OPERATING 367 ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up The Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD prevents the r
110. 7 Voice Recognition System VR 163 Warning Flasher Hazard 4 434 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 273 Warnings and Cautions sess esee rra os 6 Warranty Information ves valeo d vuv eee ened 532 Washer Addiag Fd 4 n t acras aia DEER WE ER 475 Washers Windshield 198 199 475 Washing Vecie sa dus ess REM an RR ER beets 489 Water Divine TDIOUPDD s4u4ehe id MEE RR EE E 360 Wheel and Wheel Trim u ei omni 491 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care use 491 Wiid BDUHSUDE sooie ESRA ee Gees ER 38 255 WACOM OPE x 2s3t sud x EER ROER EE 299 lunc ETER TE EA AE EE ER Ed 36 558 INDEX NEE id DOW 532321294 SEE ER FEE SET 36 Windshield Defroster SS SS 86 Windshield Washers 198 199 Pld hes AO bo OE ARE 475 Windshield Wiper Blades 474 Windshield Wipers 34 58 gt 56 a5 SE ERR ERES 198 Wiper Blade Replacement 474 hiet Bel oo desea wars AAR See dead es 198 Wipers Intermittent dese soap OR Oe Eee 198 Wipers Ram Sensilive eds s dope oe ded a ets 200 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power co
111. 89 Paice dat see KARRE eee eae aeni 22 Park Sense System Real aos cet tod e decre wears 233 Parking Drake siecatecou kas ta buen eee gee d 364 Lassme Dio aces gore aoe xut a ee ee a Ge 194 Pedals da DIE uu suia oe ouo RUE HAS DE ARE 204 Pele 25564 40ee LT 83 Placard Tire and Loading Information 380 Power Deck Lid Release srera ace at opo rd oa he ew e 39 Distribution Center Fuses 494 498 Door LOCKS AC 28 MUTO M oe pau ad eee eo TTE 99 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 256 v 171 leer 44545 Ec EE be EE DRAAD HER IA NEC 363 BUDEIDO 25 45 655504503 445545 e peer ee ees 253 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 202 ouch eT 36 Power eens Fluid x3 9 ue 935 SR 9 9 KRAAL RSS 509 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 99 Preparation for Jae sos Hide Hap dr aoe Ss 438 Pretensioners wol AP Me AIR aga DEER ek eee oe 91 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 5 eser bre DRR ES 20 Radial DIS Wes use sena ru d IER VUE ee RD 387 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 481 Radio Era c TD 328 Radio Remote Controls 34 3 nis ged 2 ba PAR 326 Rain Sensitive Wiper System 5 200 Reor Camela AAR RI oa ESOS EUR SEES 241 Rear CUpNOIMCE see sayas KERR RE RAD ROS R 261 Rear Park Sense System say rs bri e v RE beans 233 kear es Fold os d ug SERE DEER E gees 182 Rear Window Defroster 125955293 RE AES 266 Rear Window Features 552 INDE
112. 9 LOCAUON ue sone qp URN OD KROP BELEIDS 469 Belts Seat scere 6 3e teeta hea ENSSETSES 42 85 Body Mechanism Lubrication LL 474 Dike Assist SEM eva eee van d weg Ve vx oo ES 370 Brake Control System Electronic 369 bike EHI uo e ae d n nee bee Dee onde Se ey 509 Brake OV sles ER Roi ae eke SEER PAAR 484 Anu Lock ABS eare rae spa bro Y em eee 367 GES ORE OE EET ed ii treski Master CVNNGe 5 4 oen ase ERAS Hu DR RR od DDEIDS verse ea gees on ye OMREDE HER P TRES Waite DIBlb au giesa sota PER he bei Drakes Pore uoces ERIT TRU T E RCREN PES Brake Transmission Interlock 540 INDEX M Bakes ie ERROR DRAERS AA 99959 ee 484 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 83 Brightness Interior Lights sis eb RE e pars 196 Bulb Replacement oan aes mr sq eo eh os 503 504 bulbs E18 DE ss 54 bad EER 39 4 901 d S eS 87 503 Camera Real lu o8 sore ER PE DRAKE Aes 241 asistir Pr 507 Caps Filler il Eie ie Saga eed wc cw deii o6 ea gh ee es 466 467 Radiator Coolant Pressure 481 Car Washes RR OOR EE FO EN 489 Carbon Monoxide Warning 84 411 Cargo Vehicle Loading a ace qi d eames BE RS 417 Cellular Phone ii oe be ack eae ee doped ae Se 328 Certification Label nananana aaa aaa 417 Chano HIE uox cae ss bo ae oe ee ra ARE TES 393 Chance A Flat Tiie oes uid eR WERTE PETS 436 Carb Due dS eo EER ERK bd ER MEER ED 376 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light
113. ARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed Unlock the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufac
114. BI eve CONOCI 4 seai aa 6 we se se RE es 3 531 W Warranty Information 532 EM MOPARS Paris sos xd mex ERR 532 W Reporting Safety Defects 592 O In The 50 United States And Washington prop C O In Canada 528 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C W Publication Order Forms 533 El fraction Grades s eisksice EE RESTORE 535 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Temperate Grades rs ocior PR ew ee ee S 536 Quality Grades ees aaa 3 23 ed bee ORE WE he 535 HE Tread Wear 21 924 SERE SE ENE N HA 535 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 529 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you
115. Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Continued All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer eee STARTING AND OPERATING 369 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that include Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS and the Electronic Stability Control ESC All four of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving condi tions Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau lic brake pressure This prevents wheel lock up to help avo
116. C L L L L Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 523 104 000 Miles 169 000 km or 112 000 Miles 182 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 112 000 miles 182 000 km Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 104 000 miles 169 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter 1 Flush and replace the engine coolant if Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary not done at 60 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 524 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES xe 120 000 Miles 195 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service
117. CC or Normal Cruise Control 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Forward Collision Warning If Equipped Forward Collision Warning FCW warns the driver of a potential collision with the vehicle in front of you and prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the collision FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller EBC wheel speed sensors i e to calculate a probable rear end collision When the system determines that a rear end collision is probable a warning message both audible and visual will be displayed on the EVIC When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable the warning message will be deactivated 23456 mi 032433107 FCW Message NOTE The minimum speed for FCW activation is 10 mph 16 km h ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 WARNING Forward Collision Warning FCW is not intended to avoid a collision on its own The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death Changing FCW Status The FCW feature can be set to far set to near or turned off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The FCW Status Off Near or
118. EARING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC mes sage states CHANNELS CLEARED It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage while training 1 Place the ignition in the RUN position 2 Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view For optimal training point the battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED Then release both the HomeLink and handheld trans mitter buttons If the EVIC display states DID NOT TRAIN repeat Step 3 If the signal is too weak replace the battery in the handheld transmitter It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the channel has been traine
119. Far will be displayed in the Uconnect Touch display The default status of FCW is the Far setting this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time Changing the FCW status to the Near setting allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This setting provides less reaction time than the Far setting which allows for a more dynamic driving experience Changing the FCW status to Off prevents the system 3 from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you NOTE e In the Off setting FCW OFF will be displayed on the Uconnect Touch display e The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down e FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as over head objects ground reflections objects not in the path 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie of the car stationary objects that are far away oncom ing traffic or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed e FCW will be disabled like ACC below with the un available screens FCW Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error there may be a temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality Although the vehicle is still
120. Inflation Pressures duces qam c xar ze PESE 385 JAKE HP 438 439 Lie OF UGS iss hiker arp HN Ru yee Fs 991 Load S is si OER OE de mr FEEL 380 381 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 997 Pressure Warning LIENE ss eee aaa seen 275 Daal Gradio soas ae oa eG a 909 ie ER ost 535 Radial iets eens FAX gahegeeetertas e424 387 Replacement sestertia iapa means 392 ROHO 24 Eas bees ER REEKSE REG rria 399 c ee ee ee 374 384 MAR EA OT EE RE HOOR OE EES 376 DIIOW VIES 2508 0 9 3 21 FREUE eee tee HE NARE SE 395 556 INDEX M aie lie 233993 29 9 PRIEST HIST PERS Ep 436 eriqiin rr 390 Tel OWING 4 4 44 sad do e eu ee dar Sea iis 427 Tread Wear Indicators 04 29 Tot en 11000 s ducas ag eases peas eae ages 188 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 424 jon rr 419 Behind 4 Motor Home si una den RR EER 432 Disabled Velde 2 93 vas se KERE HER ED seas 453 Cun M TT 423 EE oe ARE a pe OT EE EET 432 acu FP 423 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home 432 del in OBDEOL a ocu Escenas 2 bhi eee eee Bod 369 icu C 419 Cooling System Tips caue oi RAL X UA HERE 431 HINGS n aie ooie OE Re RA ED ER EERS p 422 Mimimum Requirements 6 442206 rri 425 jo EET eee OE oe se ee 430 Trailer and Tongue Weight 4 244 4444244 424 WINS 3 nes SARA RES Kara Edo KOR eee d 429 Trailer lowing Guide si fa aste perg dave odes 423 Mauer WEIN oon ERAS SE Ree di ene ee hed 423 Rin kase PETIT 488 Iz C
121. Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters e Trunk closed away from children Operation of the Remote Start e HAZARD switch off System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death e BRAKE switch inactive brake pedal not pressed Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped e RKE PANIC button not pressed The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely e Battery at an acceptable charge level e System not disabled from previous remote start event Vehicle theft al t acti i MM e Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar e Ignition in OFF state 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low e Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle to Reset to the ON RUN position on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle NOTE The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 C2 onds The vehicle doors will lock parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle e If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low the vehicle will start and then shutdown in 10 seconds e The park lamps will turn on and rema
122. LE 2 EXAMPLE 3 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs MINUS Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib ith Occupant 3 160 Ibs AER 100 Ibs 3S Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 383 384 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in tire over heating and failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can
123. Lac nes a P Sete Hen ANG LOWER HEATED SEAT 7 Da 8 CONVERTIBLE CDNVERTELE TOP DOWN TOR Ep DOD AJAN BEE DYME RE WA NEAL AA CA LET mu ge ELON ADHIE STA RR ITT E ens PEDGEAM i ART BOOT ASSIST ETETEM 2 0 MiLA L d AWD es ALL FAILURE OF ANTHLOCK IL ILI HAAR Y ESEM WD BRAKE BRAKE STETEM FDGH WEE WAIAEN PATENG DRIVE BRAME TOW HAUL Va ahd TERRY ALL 4 LOW HAZARD Fas WHEEL DS LI uw AIM ELEtTEOnNIE ein im 0105333417 INTRODUCTION 5 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN 010805185 EE INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS N Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roa
124. MS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect ru the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation o
125. Module vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one is at idle speed hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above WARNING idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot Remember to disconnect the engine block heater is firmly on the brake pedal cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution ee STARTING AND OPERATING 351 WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal General Information The automatic transmission selects individual gears au tomatically dependent upon e Altitude e Vehicle loading e Driving style e Shift lever position e Accelerator position e Vehicle speed The gear shifting process is continuously adapted de pendent on the driving style the driving situation and the road characteristics NOTE e After selecting any driving position wait a moment to allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating especia
126. N Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle NN WHAT TODOINEMERGENCIES 451 NOTE Turn off the Electronic Stability Program ESP if equipped or Traction Control System TCS if equipped before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further information CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no transmission shifting occurring WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 452 WHAT TO
127. ND OPERATING 387 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision AI ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in B WARNING the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire and Wheel If Equipped The spare tire of your vehicle is equivalent in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehi
128. Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter Floor Mat Safety Information fering with the pedals or the ability to control the Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of vehicle your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other Ways Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Continued NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 WARNING Continued db esa zc Checks You Should Make Outside e Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that Tires have been removed for cleaning Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Ch
129. OF YOUR VEHICLE M phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Uconnect Phone Button The Uconnect Phone amp e Button is used to Ti get into the phone mode and make calls show recent incoming outgoing calls view phone book etc When you press the button you will hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Uconnect Voice Command Button The Uconnect Voice Command VR Button t VR is only used for barge in and when you are already in a call and you want to send Tones or make another call The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts There are two general meth ods for how Voice Command works 1 Say compound commands like Call John Smith mo bile 2 Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 e Prior to giving a voice command on
130. On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is programmed to Unlock All Doors 1st Press all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if Driver Door 1st Press is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If driver door first is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection press the Passive Entry soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle e Personal Settings Linked to FOB This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press the Memory Linked to FOB soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been se
131. Panel for further information 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped The Daytime Running Lights will turn ON the first time the vehicle is shifted out of PARK and remain ON unless the PARKING BRAKE is applied Upon returning to the PARK position the DRLs will remain ON DRLs will turn OFF when the ignition is switched OFF NOTE The Daytime Running Lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch Fog Light Switch To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the headlight switch To turn off the front fog lights either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch D N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 S KE An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on NOTE The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Multifunction Lever T
132. Panel for further information 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety Two latches must be released to open the hood catch to the left The safety catch is located under the NR AE loca ner DT EG LI of the instrument panel 031305159 Hood Safety Catch Hood Release Lever N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 CAUTION LIGHTS Headlight Switch To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to TY The headlight switch is located on the left side of close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi AA the instrument panel This switch controls the mately 6 in 15 cm and then drop it This should operation of the headlights parking lights instrument secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless panel lights instrument panel light dimming interior the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged lights and fog lights WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death Headlight Switch 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent
133. Power Mirrors o Power Folding Mirrors If Equipped o Heated Mirrors If Equipped O Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped ll Blind Spot Monitoring If Equipped O Rear Cross Path i222 rre iR 4264424 o Modes Of Operation Bl Uconnect Touch 4 3 O Uconnect Phone 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie El ERG 4455556244540 5524 nas OS es 112 o Phone Call Features 119 o Uconnect Phone Features 123 O Advanced Phone Connectivity 127 O Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect PHONE asse Rue OAR RE EA 127 O General Information 131 ll Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 NAV 131 Li Weonnect Phone 2224 6339 842 sean 131 Fi EO uud eset terae 4722 HE 134 H Phone Call Features cc DEER rs Goes 145 O Uconnect M Phone Features 150 H Advanced Phone Connectivity 154 H Things You Should Know About Your LD connecP PHONG EET ee DOOS HEHA 155 O General Information 163 ll Uconnect Voice Command 8 4 8 4 NAV 163 O Uconnect Voice Command System OPIO o ce S ke LO IR OE 163 D Uconnect Voice Commands 165 EVOCO TE sis 4 3 06446 65 PE E IP PES SS Ped 167 NM de ER uit Bed ee rA PCR RUE HE 171 D Power Seats If Equipped 171 O Power Lumbar If Equipped 173 D Heated Seats If Equipped 174 o Manual Seats If Equipp
134. R VEHICLE Uconnect Voice Command Non phone Universal amp Mode Commands The commands can be spoken on any screen when not on a phone call after pushing the Uconnect voice command button Navigation TEES gek gee Navigation Home listening to Guidence screen will shown your voice Prompt is on the touch Note Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and are underlined in the green shaded boxes 030536939 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 SEATS Use this switch to move the driver s seat up or down Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the forward or rearward or to recline the seatback vehicle NOTE The passenger s seat will move up or down WARNING forward or rearward e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Power Seats If Equipped Power Seat Switches On models equipped with power seats the switch is 1 Seat Control located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor 2 Seatback Control 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M
135. R limits and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for information on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation procedures Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire 428 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes CAUTION D t int t the h li ae ee ee ruins puse eo If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer loaded it should have its own brakes and they This could cause inadequate braking and possible should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this Poona as could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with WARNING ts a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic WARNING brake controller is not required e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an collision Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 lbs 907 Kg Continued STARTING AND OPERATING 429 The e
136. RK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the PARK position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 355 CAUTION CAUTION Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason moved out of PARK before the ignition light is with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in t
137. S will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Telltale Light illu minates you must increase the tire pressure to
138. Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column 031736847 Tilt Steering Lever To unlock the steering column pull the lever downward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the lever upward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The power tilt telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column 031836848 Power Tilt Telesc
139. Sunroof Express 254 D Front Seat Cupholders 259 B Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 254 D Rear Seat Cupholders esses 261 O Closing Sunroof Express 254 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 horn a er a rr c 262 W Rear Window Features 266 EL GIOVODOX Storage 23 93 e co pe OE RE HD HEK RI 262 O Rear Window Defroster ez som omm es 266 O Console Features iss ordre Rex x 262 W Load Leveling System If Equipped 267 APOO ate aed ERAS AR eye ee 264 O Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped With 60 40 Split Poldine Rear Seat s s h d 264 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclock wise rotation and requires no tools for mounting The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts f
140. TEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates that the pres sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is displayed Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON In addition the EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning
141. TENANCE SCHEDULES M 72 000 Miles 117 000 km or 80 000 Miles 130 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service 54 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 80 000 miles 130 000 km I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 72 000 miles 117 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 104 000 miles 169 000 km Inspect exhaust system Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for front axle fluid All Wheel Drive damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary AWD M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 521 88 000 Miles 143 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oi
142. The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of ti
143. Tire and Loading Information placard for axle or other parts could be damaged the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a for your vehicle trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended 426 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING WARNING Continued Improper towing can lead to an injury collision e Safety chains must always be used between your Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and it will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow eno
144. Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification La bel in Starting and Operating for further information WARNINCG It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling ee STARTING AND OPERATING 421 Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
145. X aaa Id Rearview MUTO 45244445445 BEE ee he SERE 96 Recorder Event Data 0 0004 70 Kedieonoidl TOUS soas SEER RARR prs 432 Reformulated Gasoline isses 408 ROO sie vore oe a Pata icit dei nq Sus 472 Release Hood 0 00 00 00 eee eee eee 188 Remineer Lights i sare tease wastes e bur 192 Reminder Seat Belt llle 51 Remote Control DIANE OVS pater deanegaed on tap one ea 24 Remote Keyless Entry RKE xe sae sg God gas 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 326 Remote Starting Systemi sacs aer vo on RARR tinas 24 Remote Trunk Release 3 4 xa tU RR R3 39 Replacement Bulls soo iek ke ALL RH ECRC9 1 oq 503 Replacement Keys reris deed XS dri au HO i 16 Replacement Latis is oso ke a epe eR ess 463 Replacement ites 644440 ES RS ous eas oa 092 Reporting Sately Delecis as s e et eter er PPS 532 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 274 290 Restraint Head 0 0 0 00000000 cee 179 Restraints Child 22 4062 446 5 BROEKE DIEP ee d 71 Restraints Occupant s uses ssp res DRR cs 41 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 450 Rotation Tires zu voce a don Son eR e wo RES 395 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 0 85 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 2 qos kae dv as 87 Safety Defects Reporting 532 Safety Information Tire us 2o var Rd ER ises 374 bale pS via quA Gee bho eee ees RE E 84 Dalely exhaust GaS cas gee ud ce vs Jn 9r Hae n 84 Schedul
146. a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The TPM Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals ee STARTING AND OPERATING 401 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn ON 3 Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn off the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires Vehicles with Compac
147. affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 385 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation
148. ake your vehicle to Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil an authorized dealer for service contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol WARNING A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlight switch is turned 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electro cution if not serviced properly See your authorized 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head dealer for service lamp assembly and then turn it clockwise Front Low Beam Headlamp and Park Turn Lamp AE a SERP ae eel Ee on Models with High Intensity Discharge when the headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to Headlamps HID the lights This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges HID Headlamps The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of 506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Backup Lamps Open trunk Remove fastener from cover Remove cover 1 2 3 4 Twist the bulb one quarter turn to remove 5 Reinstall new bulb 6 Install cover and fastener License Lamp 1 Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear 1 License Lamp
149. an replace B s on 8 with any other satellite station name received by the Radio 4 You can replace 8 with any other satellite station name received by the Radio 030536631 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Hands Free Music Control These commands can be spoken when playing music from your SD card USB device CD or iPad after pushing the Uconmect voice command button Radio will play the Audio Book Dr Jekyll and Mr Hyde Radio will play the Song Maple Leaf Rag Radio will play the alburn Radio will play the Artist Scott the Playlist Party lunes Joplin Note Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030536938 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 Uconnect Voice Command Travel Link commands The commands can be spoken on any screen when not on a phone call after pushing the Uconnect vwolos command Dutton ximsert talking head loon on the steering wheel Screen will ps will Screen will Screen will change t change to Travel Link change to change to Travel Link M Travel Link Travel Link Listings PORK Screen will change to NFL Headlines Screen will change to Trawel Link Screen will change to Travel Link Fuel Prices Note Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and are underlined in the green shaded boxes 030536937 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOU
150. and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any trans mission only the approved lubricant may be used Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487 Fluid Level Check CAUTION Continued Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted e The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating If you notice fluid loss or transmission malfunction have conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe CAUTION damage to the transmission may occur Your au thorized dealer has the proper tools
151. apping the shift lever to the D position at a stop will allow starting in second gear After a stop the driver should manually upshift D the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated To disengage AutoStick mode hold the shift lever to the right D for a few seconds You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury ALL WHEEL DRIVE AWD IF EQUIPPED This vehicle is equipped with an active on demand All Wheel Drive AWD system which makes available optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and driving conditions The system minimizes wheel slip by automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear wheels as necessary To maximize fuel economy your AWD vehicle automati cally defaults to rear wheel drive RWD when road and environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is unlikely to occur When specific road and environmental conditions require increased levels of road traction the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 359 CAUTION All wheels must have the same size and type tires vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode Automatic AWD operation could be activated by outside tempera ture wheel slip or other predetermined conditions there may be a
152. apply the brakes before shifting from PARK e The highest available transmission gear is displayed in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC whenever the Electronic Range UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 Select ERS feature is active Use the selector on the shift lever to activate ERS Refer to Automatic Transmission in Starting And Operating for further information 18 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi e mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 19 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the
153. ardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you 464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION You can be badly injured working on or around a e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per motor vehicle Only do service work for which you form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an autho
154. are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement 504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Exterior Bulb Number Low Beam Headlamp Standard Halogen H11 Low Beam Headlamp High Intensity Discharge HID on coe todo tue adh ade eet s D3S Serviced at Authorized Dealer High Beam Headlamp suu sack qa au ae fe RED AE 9005 Front Park Dan Lamp vae dor ESSE 3157A Front Fog Lamp If Equipped PSXQAW Front Side Marker ies cea eo mda DR ee Ai 168 Rear Tod Lamp accu ian SEN do bros 9 don EED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear Stop Turn Lamp deae aanak LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear ide VERSES os asus cow E EDE ELDER ES 168 Backup Lamp sis os EER ha en MOS aed anb 9157 Center High Mount Stop Lamp CHMSL LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Es AAR AE AE SE OS Oe eee EE 168 BULB REPLACEMENT Front Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp and Side Marker Lamp Models with Halogen Headlamps 1 Open the hood NOTE Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle 2 Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun terclockwise and then pull it out of the headlamp assembly N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505 CAUTION this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails t
155. artridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Natural Relay 0 25 Amp SEE 2 10 Amp AWD Module Natural Red Front Axle Discon EE 36 10 Amp Anti Lock Brake Red Module es Spare Fi 10 Amp _ Engine Controller Red Rad Fan Relays E 20 Amp Vacuum Pump EJ NES 10 Amp Airbag Module Yellow me a Fuse Spare 99 10 Amp Power Steering 498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Power Distribution Center There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel This center _ ec and bu Rear Power Distribution Center Opening The Access Panel MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499 CAUTION Cartridge Description use Fuse e When installing the power distribution center Front PDC Feed 1 cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Fuse Spare Front PDC Feed 2 Sunroof Exterior Lighting 1 Exterior Lighting 2 Interior Lighting Washer Pump
156. at belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Cycle the ignition to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully com pleted the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the driver s seat belt is unbuckled Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is an accident Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed
157. ating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The automatic load leveling system will provide a level riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height It takes 3 approximately 1 mile 1 6 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours the leveling system will bleed itself down The vehicle must be driven to reset the system UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS N Instrument Panel Features 271 WM Instrument Cluster 0 272 H Instrument Cluster Descriptions 249 Bl Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVE MET see ee EO RE RE N pee FIG 283 D Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Be PT 285 O EVIC White Telltale Lights a 224 ue ma 286 O EVIC Amber Telltale Ligh
158. ation Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The ParkSense system uses four sensors located in the rear bumper fascia to scan for obstacles up to 79 in 200 cm away from the rear bumper fascia ParkSense provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate the range of the object Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System When the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system is mal functioning the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a fault condition the EVIC will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SEN SORS or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM mes sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate If CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS appears in the EVIC and the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction see your authorize
159. ations Modifications Vehicle 7 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 367 369 Anti Lock Warning Light se eR ees 274 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 479 507 Bee MR ER HE OE OE a 482 ppe ance Cale ua Gye gene eos PER STE PE 489 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 17 Auto Down Power Windows 37 Auto Unlock Doors eee 29 Auto Up Power Windows s i3e9x9RTOGORS GRO 37 Automatic Dimming Mitror soe speke wea we 96 Ne INDEX 539 Automatic Door Locks 2 iS EWER EEUE FR AE 29 Agtomauc FHeadlishts 2332 939 309 9908 HEER ED d 190 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 290 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 337 7 Automatic Transaxle Special Additives 24 9 9e x RE ath x9 Rh n 486 Automatic Transmission 353 486 487 Adding Fluid iese ro chop EE RE d 487 509 Dia dis AA APART EE ETE 357 Fluid and Filter Changes uaa 84449900 487 PC CONS soas nee doge PYP ROME P a ae 487 Fluid Level Check stik dees ERAS ERES 487 Nu E M 509 er diu MMC D 354 ulii 999 Special Addifiv s 426255848754 Gass Me FORE 486 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode 356 huic PD TP 357 Ludis 509 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 509 P ar LONON seks uea qo doe SEA MEE 380 PICIT soes Ke dod QR I ERE RE RR ane ewe ees 469 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 2
160. atory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers equipment designed for the purpose following equip or associated brackets State and local laws applying to ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is vehicles under tow must be observed 454 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position If the vehicle s battery is discharged see Shift Lever Override in What To Do In Emergencies for instruc tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the PARK position for towing CAUTION e Do not use sling type equipment when towing Damage to the fascia will occur e When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to the front or rear suspension compo nents Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result e If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ON position not in the LOCK or ACC positions The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur Flatbed towing is recommended DO NOT tow an AWD vehicle with the r
161. ay Adaptive Cruise Control Off 032433097 WARNING Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system on when not in use is dangerous You could acciden tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have a collision Always leave the system off when you are not using it To Set A Desired ACC Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed ACC Set Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal If you do not the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed If this occurs e The message DRIVER OVERRIDE will display in the EVIC 032433098 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 e The system will not be controlling the distance be To Cancel tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead The vehicle The system will disable ACC without erasing the speed will only be determined by the position of the memory if accelerator pedal e You softly tap the brake pedal e You depress the brake pedal 3 e You press the CANCEL switch e An Anti Lock Brake System ABS event occurs Driver Override e f the transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL n cn e The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys ACC 55 mph tem ESC TCS activates 032433099 Driver Override 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC
162. ber with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone simply touch the Mute button on the Phone main screen Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions de
163. bined weight of occupants and cargo and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Re fer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information 424 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 425 NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional CAUTION factory installed options or dealer installed options must e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine Refer to the
164. bjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Continued 412 STARTING AND OPERATING See CAUTION Ethanol Fuel E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can 15 unleaded gasoline operate on E 85 WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Vat an MAE amp eo er Pan Eain RA bef A MNE Fuel Requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with 8tae46a9 an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two For best results a refueling pattern that alternates between E 85 and unleaded gasoline should be E 85 Badge avoided NS TA TING AND OPERATING 413 When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full e you do not add less than 5 gallons 19 Liters when refueling e you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at
165. ble warn ing or information messages These pop up messages fall into several categories e Five Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Most of the messages of this type are then stored as long as the condition that activated it remains active and can be reviewed from the Messages main menu item As long as there is a stored message an i will be displayed in the EVIC s compass outside temp line Examples of this message type are Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out and Low Tire Pressure e Unstored Messages This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared Examples 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See of this message type are Turn Signal On if a turn signal is left on and Lights On if driver leaves the vehicle e Unstored Messages Until RUN These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state Examples of this message type are Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar and Press Brake and Push Button to Start e Five Second Unstored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Ex amples of this message type are Memory Syst
166. brake Once the ENGINE START STOP button is in the OFF position the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle NS TA TING AND OPERATING 353 Over Temperature Mode The transmission electronics constantly monitor the transmission oil temperature If the transmission exceeds normal operating temperature the transmission will change the way it shifts to help control the condition This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the DRIVE position After the transmission cools down it will return to normal operation Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition light is in the OFF position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the RUN position by pressing the ENGINE START STOP button once or twice engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Five Speed Automatic Transmission Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears Shift Lever 354 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Gear Ranges PA
167. ca acd aote dos Sb ew ear d 461 W Replacement Parts sie pes RET v 463 W Dealer Service 0000 eee 463 Bl Maintenance Procedures 464 BEREID i5ayaceu se ees dhe VER 465 E Engine QU PHEGE san 2 EERS erg BEN n 468 E Engine Air Cleaner Filter 414 ca se ax os 468 O Maintenance Eree Battery vivas dar Ras 469 O Air Conditioner Maintenance 471 O A C Air Filler eee 0 Body Lubrication o Windshield Wiper Blades 474 o Adding Washer Fluid seus 475 HLExhausb Systemi 14 522304 34 abri eens a 476 458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M EG oo sie 23494394 5 eee Pea HS 478 EI DIES D leid a oce doe cogadh aie p DR d 484 D Automatic Transmission 486 o All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped 488 Hd Read de 2 gant ues Soha pS eo ware RR 2 488 D Appearance Care And Protection From GOOSEN Serv ad pod eee ERG ees eae 489 fu MR ORE EE EE OE EE IE 494 H Integrated Power Module 494 O Rear Power Distribution Center 498 Mi Vehicle Storage 0 0 503 W Replacement Bulbs 503 W Bulb Replacement 2 0 504 O Front Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp And Side Marker Lamp Models With Halogen LicadlanipSue eo sc ede i o kot ce heh s DES 504 D Front Low Beam Headlamp And Park Turn Lamp Models With High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID 5
168. cents the system may not always work for some 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in your favorites phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows dry weather conditions and operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to
169. cle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h 388 STARTING AND OPERATING M vehicle has an option for a spare tire matching original equipment tire and wheel refer to the recommended tire rotation pattern in Tire Rotation Recommendations in Starting and Operating for further information If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip ment tire and wheel as a spare a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non matching tempo rary use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one non matching temporary use spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation
170. cludes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 normal conditions However in an accident the belt will WARNING Continued lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat vehicle or being thrown out belts are designed to go around the large bones of WARNING your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of an accident best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In an accident people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure
171. connect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the mobile phone has network coverage and stays paired to the Uconnect Phone touch The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep Working With Automated Systems say Iowing Assistance This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touc
172. connect chrysler interface html e www chrysler com crossbrand uconnect dodge interface html e www chrysler com crossbrand uconnect jeep interface html If your mobile phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any Uconnect Phone features Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES
173. coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery fy bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean 484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake peda
174. ct If the turn signal is then activated and it corresponds to an N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and de tected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audio alerts will be issued In addition to the audible alert the radio if on volume will be reduced NOTE e Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system the radio volume is reduced e If the hazard flashers are on the system will request the appropriate visual alert only When the system is in RCP the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is re quested the radio is also muted Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always requests the chime Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems NOTE The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used UCONNECT TOUCH 4 3 Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconn
175. ct you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 1 800 485 2001 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 532 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component
176. ct the e To remove a Favorite select phonebook from the Options Select an empty entry and touch the on that Phone main screen selected entry When the Options pop up appears touch Add from mobile You will then be asked which contact 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE i e Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and then touch the Options soft key e Touch the next to the Favorite you would like to remove 68 af FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out We 72 Phonebook gt a ER Mobile E Voicemail Remove from Favs Favorites a Buddy s Pizza r Mom s Cell Emergency e The Options pop up will display touch Remove from Favs Emergency And Towing Assistance The Emergency and Towing Favorite numbers can only be altered These cannot be deleted and the names cannot be changed To change the Emergency or Towing number follow these steps e Touch the phonebook soft key from the Phone main screen e Touch the Favorites soft key Next scroll to the bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Favor ites e Touch the Options soft key e Touch the next to appropriate Favorite that is to be altered N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 68 af FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out VW 72 Phonebook gt pie EE LS Mobile E Voicemail Edit Number l Reset to Default avorites Pepe Roni a Buddy s Pizza e The Op
177. d Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 378 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing its L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or
178. d NOTE e The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button e The Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a different size tire is installed on one wheel such as the compact spare tire if equipped To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is
179. d NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn the ESC on again by momen tarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in t
180. d the EVIC display will now state CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the EVIC display still states CHANNEL TRAIN ING repeat Step 3 NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System Programming A Rolling Code System At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE E 2 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 80
181. d Leaks eee 88 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 487 Drake iese be oooh eee ee ASE ees Se 484 toelae EIE sens E34 9306 RAS DUE d 479 Eusino Oil AE ORE oe ORR AS 465 Transfer Case ssa 24 RE RE HER EER RO AR RE 488 Fluid Brake onse uebea 439393828 DAE N 509 Fd ERROR AA PU E Eu B rS B 508 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 508 FOS erui P 192273 PONG Ret ocd ua sie qued eei cane ee oa 182 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 4 444464 dr RES tiris 450 Duel RT N FREE AW WE RN 407 Additives 641446 46 ir des tarde EERS OO HE 410 SE ie eesse OE OE OE ee eo OB ee 408 KONSERTE 2 424n0e4 ee vere EER ER eee 292 Ethanol ss 6 4 686045 ERA a 408 Piller Cap Gas Cap acu sos gea eei d oh x 278 Filler Door Gas Cap uoa dius serpi 278 SqGOUNG EER ERROR Y Robur dd ERA BER 407 si ORE DEERE EE PEER IE 278 B1 AE OE EE OR Ed 287 Materials Added SS SS 0008 410 N INDEX 545 WietWanOl 2 2544 4e25 4826246544 SOEK 408 Cone RE aus 43A ee eae ORES SONS d 508 Saver MOUE sissies eee eee note aes eee 202 Specifications ud acus dU e EE UR Rot o ie d 508 TARR ie ie odie des d e IT ORE os 507 FuClOOUMIZee xo acractim a s KORS piece Soa H RS 292 Piel Savel ous xus SERS ORREL ye Rud IS m OE 292 Fuel Flexible lens 411 ei evecare seed DE e emer mad d ed 494 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 246 Gasoline Fuel ies der se ced eed EA ERE PIAS 407 KOM ERNS usui tiera ie aes ao Xe ac
182. d dealer If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the EVIC see your authorized dealer Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operat ing properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense When you turn ParkSense off the EVIC will display PARK ASSIST OFF Furthermore once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the EVIC will display PARK ASSIST OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE e Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc m
183. d dealer for any airbag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the airbag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in a collision The Airbag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with airbag system electrical components While the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer ser vice the airbag system immediately e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for approximately four to eight seconds when the ignition is first cycled to ON RUN e The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the ap proximate four to eight second interval e The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie located o
184. d hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When displayed static grid lines will illustrate the width zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the of the vehicle while a dashed center line will indicate the vehicle The following table shows the approximate center of
185. d mobile phone is accessible This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Managing Your Favorite Phonebook There are three ways you can add an entry to your Favorite Phonebook 1 During an active call of a number to make a favorite touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the phone main screen 2 After loading the mobile phonebook select phone book from the Phone main screen then select the appro priate number Touch the next to the selected number to display the options pop up In the pop up select Add to Favorites NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 68 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out ETE and number to choose from your mobile phonebook ees HOE TE AR Er When complete the new favorite will be shown r4 r1 amp Ana Conda Mobile Add to Favorites f 248 123 4567 68 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Wo 72 Phonebook gt Fa ryt r4 F 248 456 7891 t 2 Mobile E Voicemail Add from Mobile Favorites Wm 248 577 6215 Empty maa Mom s Cell e Emergency Towing Assistance NOTE If the Favorites list is full you will be asked to remove an existing favorite 3 From the Phone main screen select phonebook From To Remove A Favorite the phonebook screen select favorites and then sele
186. d release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Info displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the available information displays then press SELECT to display anyone of the following choices e Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature e Oil Temperature Displays the actual oil temperature e Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure e Trans lemperature Displays the actual transmission temperature e Engine Hours Displays the hours of engine operation e Tire Pressure Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire EXCLUDING THE SPARE TIRE Messages Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons This feature shows the number of stored warning mes sages in the place holder Pressing the SELECT button 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M will allow you to see what the stored messages are Pressing the BACK button takes you back to the Main Menu Turn Menu OFF Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button Press ing the SELECT button blanks the menu display Pressing any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the menu back Uconnect TOUCH SETTINGS The Uconnect Touch system uses a combination of soft and hard keys located on the center of the instru
187. d the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the mobile phone has network coverage and stays paired to the Uconnect Phone Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the amp button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Workin
188. de KIN Keyless Enter N Go Feature This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature refer to Starting Procedure in Starting And Operating for further information Keyless Ignition Node KIN This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment The Keyless Ignition Node KIN has four operating positions three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position The three positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The fourth position is START during start RUN will illuminate NOTE In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button the RKE transmitter Key Fob may have a low or dead battery In this situation a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch Put the nose side side opposite of the emergency key of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch START STOP Oy 3 ENGINE Keyless Ignition Node KIN 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead The emergency key is also for locking
189. de Airbags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air bag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the out board side of the front seats 7 022607296 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag Label When the airbag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each airbag deploys independently that is a left side impact deploys the left airbag only and a right side impact deploys only the right airbag Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC airbags may offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the SAB and SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occupant protection WARNINCG e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where
190. de collision is required Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags SABIC air bags SAB Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag are designed to provide additional protec tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 The Advanced Front Airbags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protectio
191. drivable under normal conditions FCW will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating FCW again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer Service FCW Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor it indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor 96789 mi ACC FCW Unavailable Warning 032433104 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
192. dworthiness and safety and may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl A Word About Your Keys 12 O Keyless Ignition Node Kin 12 Elk os BOB sio ye Shee x RESP Pu S owe De 13 H Ignition Or Accessory On Message 14 NM Sentry Key EE EE OR N 15 El Replacement Keys 2 424 2x R LERE RES HD 16 O Customer Key Programming 17 O General Information su ss c9 bre meg e 17 W Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped I B Rearming Of The System O To Arm The System o To Disarm The System Bl Illuminated Entry If Equipped ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE o To Unlock The Doors D To Lock The Doors O To Unlatch The Trunk D Using The Panic Alarm 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE i O Programming Additional Transmitters 22 O Wind PUNCHING 424 5 225 RAL KRAKE AO ee 38 O Transmitter Battery Replacement 23 MB Trunk Lock And Release 39 O General Information 2x mr CR mt HR 24 Bi lrunk Safety Warning seo mmm 40 lll Remote Starting System If Equipped 24 O Trunk Emergency Release 40 o How To Use Remote Start ies WER A EDS DE 25 W Occupant Restraints c ss vei ques EA RR SR RE 41 E Door Locks 0 0 0 eee eee 27 O Lap Shoulder Belts n a RR RA Ree 42 O Manual Door Locks
193. e NOTE For devices which are not made a favorite the device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest device paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR command to bring up a list of paired audio devices e Show Paired Audio Devices Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Device Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority paired phone and Bluetooth audio device within range If you would need to choose a particular phone or device follow the steps e Touch the Phone soft key e Touch the Settings soft key e Touch to select the particular phone or device e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Disconnecting A Device e Touch the Phone soft key e Touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Options soft key then touch the next to the appropriate device to be disconnected e The options pop up will be displayed e Touch the Disconnect Device soft key e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Deleting A Device e Touch the Make Favorite soft key e Touch the Phone soft key e You will see the chosen device move to the top of the list e Touch the Settings soft key Touch the X t it out of th tti e Touch the Options soft key then touch the next to e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen the appropriate device to be disconnected Phoneboo
194. e The engine oil level must be checked under the hood e Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition is first cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the
195. e Maintenance leen 512 Seat Belt Maintenance ses be DRR OD mms 493 Seat Det Reminder 2 x 3 odore E RE soe RC dut 51 Seat Bells i ka eae XXe x eee ee UR RARE es 41 42 85 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 48 And Pregnant Women 6 242424 t4eaeeeeee es 53 N INDEX 553 Child Restraint 2229224259999 3 39 71 72 73 80 lid IRE TTTSTTTTTTTTRCTICTOITTOTIT DJ PROM Deol AAR AA OIE Ge ae Bee 4244 liso seo CC HEARD 85 Operating INSHMCHONS uiatssbuta te urs a Se dies 14 Pretensioners 2 00 cee eee ees 51 Rest Sel a zc 3 en edP ee PREG cod a bare cts 42 Untwisting Procedure ss sue cho mde s hob DE 48 ei cow wa OE BERE N EE ROS TN 171 8 abcr ADT 186 Head Restraints 5326 ym UR ones 179 el ve 299 Euer oe ee BOR Eee eee es 174 Heg PAIS HODIE eag eh vane pa EER 171 WIGRICLY cow ideas 4 PER Ud eee as 183 LOWE siese RESEP deo Bd apr RD ae ROS 171 Rear FOIE P 182 peatback Release 5s c RR EE OG Raa ee 182 TUS 4 hoe ee ee a ones os SETEL 171 Security Alarm Theft Alarm s 2 e eter ee os 17 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 479 508 Selection of Oil 224444080 a9 EL PESE SES 466 Sentry Key ImmobllZet soie pues a sp DE RE us 15 sentry Key Programming si sis Remy ees 17 Sentry Key Replacement 9 05 24d 2 4 Sure a wise Hoe 16 Service Assistance 0 SE ES SS eens 529 Service Contact ces ascenso Gs maid SS HE ws 531 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator SS SS SS 276 Service Ma
196. e Off Power Delay soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect Phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status press the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft key followed by pressing the arrow back soft key NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 Compass Settings e Variance Press the Variance soft key to change this display Com pass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differ ences and provide the most accurate compass heading For the most accurate compass performance the compass must be set using the following steps NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 040506040 7 8 9 Compass Variance Map LA e Calibration Press the Calibration key to change this s
197. e a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To ignore the call touch the Ignore soft key on the touch screen You can also touch the answer soft key or touch the blue caller ID box Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the phone amp e button answer soft key or caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the EVR button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 in progress Or you can place a call on hold by touching the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen then dial a number from the dialpad recent calls SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks To go back to the
198. e available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have Ways To Initiate A Phone Call Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect Phone e Redial e Dial by touching in the number e Voice Command Dial Digital Contact Redial or Call Back e Mobile Phonebook e Recent Call Log NOTE All of the above operations except Redial can be done with 1 call or less active Dial By Saying A Number e Press the amp button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Dial 248 555 1212 e The Uconnect Phone will dial 248 555 1212 Call By Saying A Name e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call John Doe Mobile e The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated with John Doe or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MEE Call Controls The touch screen allows you to control the following call features Answer End Ignore Hold unhold Mute unmute Transfer the call to from the phone owap 2 active calls Conference join 2 active calls together Touch Tone Number Entry Touch the Phone soft key e Touch t
199. e control to Panel or Bi Level and tum on AVC Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise oet the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle set the Mode control to Recirculate with A C on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level with A C on If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel and turn on A C If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control to Bi Level zz with A C on Adjust Temperature control for comfort Set the Mode control to Mix or Defrost Sg Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear Set the Mode control to Floor d If it s sunny you may want more upper air In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 74 In very cold weather if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control to Mix or Defrost as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 045636890 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS li Starting Procedures 346 O Automatic Transmission 346 HKevless Enter N GO 4 seas eee Ss p OE bo os 347 E Normal IE 2 299995 2 93 REOR eee GES 347 D Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or x 10 rm 348 oO If Engine Fails To Start 5 2292 99 4x eed 349 TANET AOE tas see EARR ER 349 ll Engine Block Heater If Equipped 350 Bl Automatic Transmission
200. e is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts Outside Mirrors Approach Light If Equipped Driver and passenger outside mirrors equipped with approach lighting contain one LED which is located in the upper outboard mirror glass corner The approach light supplies illuminated entry lighting which turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open any door This LED shines outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles It also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of the doors Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the driver s view of the ground rearward of the front doors The outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE The outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mir rors in Reverse position N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 NOTE e The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned on when delivered from the factory The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System e Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understand ing Yo
201. e jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 446 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Compact Spare Tire The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity e Keep tire inflated to 60 psi 414 KPa cold inflation pressure e This tire is designed as an emergency spare only Do not exceed 50 mph 80 km h speed WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 60 mph 100 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 447 NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack NOTE The remote battery posts are viewed by sta
202. e must wait for the beep which follows the Listen prompt or an other prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Call and then John Smith and then mobile the following com pound command can be said Call John Smith mo bile e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Search for John Smith or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Search Contact and when asked John Smith Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Natural Speech Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition VR engine Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly omith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the assoc
203. e time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability STARTING AND OPERATING 415 ADDING FUEL 1 Press the fuel filler door release switch located in the driver s door map pocket 056810781 Fuel Filler Door 3 There is no fuel filler cap A flapper door inside the pipe seals the system Fuel Filler Door Release Switch 4 Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe the 2 Open the fuel filler door nozzle opens and holds the f
204. e turn signal is on When Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deactivated To change the Blind Spot Alert status press the Off Lights or Lights amp Chime soft key followed by pressing the arrow back soft key NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification e Parkview Backup Camera Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate To make your selection press the Parkview Backup Camera soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Rain Sensing Auto Wipers When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses mo
205. e windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Feature Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper de
206. eadings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors e Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and e TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires A spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings IN The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instru 4 ment cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE message and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire wan the w tire pressure values flashing mi Pu z TE 3 270921 819793fc STARTING AND OPERATING 403 Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recom mended cold placard pressure inflation value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will s
207. ear wheels from over braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti Lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e The clicking sound of solenoid valves e Brake pedal pulsations and e Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS 368 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING WARNING Continued e The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capa bility Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals Pumping of the Anti Lock
208. ear wheels on the ground N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 455 If the transmission is operable vehicles WITHOUT AWD may be towed with rear wheels on the ground under the following conditions e The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL e The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 mi 24 km e The vehicle speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground on a flatbed or with the rear wheels raised using a wheel lift and the transmission in NEUTRAL CAUTION Failure to follow these towing methods can cause severe transmission damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Vehicles equipped with AWD can be towed with the transmission in NEUTRAL and the rear wheels OFF the ground with no limitation on speed or distance Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the OFF position The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS N Engine Compartment 3 6L 459 N Engine Compartment 5 7L 460 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD IH 461 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance L EDOTOBIS S 4 oe decur d
209. eck the tires including spare for proper pressure Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control Lights If required mounting posts must be properly Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights installed if not equipped from the factory while you work the controls Check turn signal and high Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or beam indicator lights on the instrument panel mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll Mirrors O Inside Day Night Mirror D Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped D Outside Mirrors o Outside Mirrors Folding Feature O Driver s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped o Outside Mirrors Approach Light If Equipped O Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped O
210. ect Phone supports the following features Voice Activated features Hands Free dialing via Voice Call John Smiths Mo bile or Dial 248 555 1212 Redialing last dialed numbers Redial Calling Back the last incoming call number Call Back View Call logs on screen Show incoming calls Show Outgoing calls Show missed Calls Show Recent Calls Searching Contacts phone number Search for John Smith Mobile Screen Activated Features Dialing via Keypad using touch screen Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis played on the touch screen e Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen e Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs e Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the touch screen e Pairing up to 10 phones audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone For Uconnect customer support call e For Chrysler vehicles call 1 800 247 9753 e For Dodge vehicles call 1 800 423 6343 e For Jeep vehicles call 1 877 426 5337 e For Ram Truck vehicles call 1 866 726 4636 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 For a list of compatible phones see the Uconnect websites e www chrysler com crossbrand u
211. ect for your child 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Infants And Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH WARNING Rearward facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children And Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in t
212. ecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take pre cedence over other paired phones within range N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Bluetooth pairing successful Droid Incredible Make this phone the favorite 030536950 NOTE For phones which are not made a favorite the phone priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest phone paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR commands to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio e Show Paired Phones or e Connect My Phone Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device e Touch the Player soft key to begin e Change the Source to Bluetooth Touch the Bluetooth soft key e Touch the Add Device soft key NOTE If there is no device currently connected with the system a pop up will appear e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled audio device When prompted on the device enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen e Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device Selecting Yes will make this device the highest priority This device will take precedence over other paired devices within rang
213. ed 177 H Head RESTAS se Abbe tag om eh ee gone AE 179 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 EF Olds Neal sdb Gian oanu cee auete ue es 182 N Driver Memory Seat If Equipped 183 O Programming The Memory Feature 184 O Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory 185 o Memory Position Recall is 186 O Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory Seat Only a usse egt oe E ER RD dew 186 ll To Open And Close The Hood 188 buc rcr PITT 189 Elle dlielt WIE os he ae Ha DAY cie od 189 H Automatic Headlights If Equipped 190 o Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only 190 O Smartbeam If Equipped 190 O Headight duie Delay a nde orat 3 9 EDE DS 191 o Daytime Running Lights DRL If Ee bed 426 an sie PR RD Potro aoe ee a O Lights On Reminder D Fog Lights If Equipped 82k eei 192 E Multifunction Lever ii seen ed RR 193 Hire al osse AE aay 9 P 9 RR epa dE 193 DL Lane Change Assist ie cw reci oer deos 194 o High Low Beam Switch ius 194 o Flash To Pass 522 39 3323 X REPE 194 O Front Map Reading Lights 194 E AmbielL DIBBE seset aa iia Ee ge DEd 196 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Fi iterior MICS serite eee eet ee ewe cs 196 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 198 O Intermittent Wiper System 198
214. ed and power tilt and telescopic steer ing column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter can also be programmed to recall the same posi tions when the UNLOCK button is pressed NOTE e Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the memory positions e Passive Entry door handles cannot be linked to the memory function Use either the memory recall switch or the RKE transmitter if linked to the memory feature to recall memory positions 1 or 2 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The memory switch is located on the driver s door trim panel The switch contains an S button to activate the memory save function It also contains a rocker switch labeled with the number 1 and the number 2 The rocker switch allows the driver to recall either of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the appro priate side of the switch ul NN Memory Seat Switches Programming The Memory Feature NOTE Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory To create a new memory profile perform the following 1 Place the ignition into the RUN position 2 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences ie seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and radio station presets 3 Press and release the SET 5 button on the memory swi
215. ed have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners
216. ed Adjusted Volume press the Off 1 2 or 3 soft key followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Surround Sound Press the Surround Sound soft key to change this display Provides simulated surround sound mode To make your selection press the Surround Sound soft key select ON or OFF followed by pressing the arrow back soft key N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 Phone Bluetooth e Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Touch Supplement SIRIUS Setup e Channel Skip SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection press the Channel Skip Seats soft key select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Subscription Info New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with your radio Following expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Sub scription Information screen in order to re subscribe Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SIRIUS Trav
217. edule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 40 000 miles 65 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 48 000 Miles 78 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule m m Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 48 000 miles 78 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive AWD change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 518 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 56 000 Miles 91 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine
218. eeze 479 507 508 Corrosion Protection ee eee 489 Cruise Control Speed Control 209 RUPNOIGERS iss PER HELE es ae ES 259 494 Customer Assistance asa aor HOED BAR ER RD 4 529 Data Recorder Event 0 000048 70 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 197 Daytime Running Lights 192 SAP SEIVICe fia GG sae s xu RAP eae Ce ee 463 Deck Lid Emergency Release 40 Deck Lid Power Release 39 Defroster Rear Window 266 Defroster Windshield LL 86 335 Delay Intermittent Wipers 198 Diagnostic System Onboard 461 Dimmer Switch Headlight 194 Dipsticks OEDS 2444 REG wx S Geyser eee one es 465 Disabled Vehicle TOWING 24420459 ORR RS HOE 453 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant or a id Eise Old Ee ese m Door LOCKS amp 44 2628 6 ERA RAAS AR RES ES ES Door Locks Automatic Door Opener Garage nso heen PRE oes es Driving On Slippery Surfaces Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Walei usce soe Re he sini Tew BS TS Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy Ee Pel oou 250 odie wd P dau epu e E Beds Electric Rear Window Defrost Electric Remote Mirrors deut rem Ren Electrical Power Outlets 222394 ER RR EE Electronic Brake Control System Anti Lock Brake System Brake Assis
219. ehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires You or others can be badly burned by hot engine disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If testing or for prolonged periods during Very rough you see or hear steam coming from under the idle or malfunctioning operating conditions hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479 Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to
220. el Link is a separate subscription Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Settings Customer Programmable Features Press the More soft key then press the Settings soft key to display the menu setting screen In this mode the Uconnect Touch system allows you to access program mable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start Engine Off Operation Compass Settings Audio Phone Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time 68 ad FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Settings Display Clock Safety amp Driving Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start Uconnect Touch 8 4 Soft keys When making a selection press the soft key to enter the desired mode Once in the desired mode press and release the preferred setting until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been se lected Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or press the X soft key to close out of the settings screen Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft keys on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings Display After pressing the Display soft key the following settings will be available NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
221. em 364 Multi Function Control Lever 193 Navigation System uconnect gps 241 New Vehicle Break In Period 83 Occupant Restraints s uu 24 See R Saas 41 62 67 Occupant Restraints Sedan 58 62 66 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 508 Odometer 33 mx exi unes oo a S EXC RR SER 274 Oil Change Indicator URE REEKS ges 274 290 Oil Change Indicator Reset 274 290 Oil Piller Canes eni HAARD eed GED ee 468 Oil Filter Selection i s cem 568 ESRA RS OES 468 Od EEUE terer Eos eee bed EE EET 465 508 ar P r 507 Change Interval 253 55 d ok ea Ke RD ees 290 466 Bug saas ona eae ogee DOE ERENS 465 DiE csr tne ee ee 4 ooo oe ee DERS a 465 Disposal C 468 nc P 468 508 Filter Disposal sai RAKA SE RER pr 0 e455 468 Ident icaUon LOLO aros 455 Eae ns HE wd 466 Materials Added to 4 55824444 deret 60s 467 Recommendation n 466 507 yard MD 467 MISGOSID s wa e See Pe Ee v Ed UR 466 467 507 Onboard Diagnostic System Lus 461 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 246 Opetaune Precautions iste ive coe sd 934 5 461 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 2 Outside Rearview Mirrors 0 97 Overhead Console wee wets DE 9d Re Go HE 244 Overheating Pneine sy ia eye AE DI RR RE 282 434 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 533 N INDEX 551 Eie MORAAL EARS UeRE RAESERS 4
222. em Un available Not in Park and Automatic High Beams On The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right amber telltales in the middle and red telltales on the left EVIC White Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell tales These telltales include e Shift Lever Status The shift lever status P R N D L 5 4 3 2 1 are displayed indicating the shift lever position Telltales 5 4 3 2 1 indicate the Electronic Range Select ERS feature has been engaged and the gear selected is displayed For further information on ERS refer to Starting And Oper ating e Electronic Speed Control ON This light will turn on when the electronic SE speed control is ON For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Electronic Speed Control SET This light will turn on when the electronic O speed control is SET For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC ON This light will turn on when the ACC is ON R5 For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC SET This light will turn on when the ACC is SET For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding
223. en raining on the passive entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time e f the vehicle is unlocked by the RKE transmitter or Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds the vehicle will re lock and if equipped will arm the theft alarm To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver door handle grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 021837301 Grabbing The Driver s Door Handle NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver s door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock both doors automati cally The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All
224. ent airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this fea ture is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode if equipped The blower speed may increase when Defrost mode is selected If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting 5 Rear Defrost Button Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 6 Passenger Temperature Control Up Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for warmer temperature set tings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 7 Passenger Temperature Control Down Button Pr
225. er to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous 032737805 Fast Tone 032737804 Slow Tone 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Continuous Tone 032737806 The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert opera tion when the system is detecting an obstacle NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 WARNING ALERTS Rear vi Greater Don 79 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 12 in 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Chime Second Tone Slow Fast Continuous Display Message Park Assist On Warning Object Warning Object Warning Object Warning Object Detected Detected Detected Detected Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow Continuous Flashing Flashing Flashing Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled using the Uconnect Touch System The available choices are Off Sound Only or Sound and Display Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the ParkSense soft key is pressed to disable the system the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST OFF message for approximately five seconds Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Inform
226. ering Directed Lights soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Headlight Dip Iraffic Changeover Low beam headlights have more control of upward light and direct most of their light downward and either to the 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M right for right had drive countries or to the left for left hand drive countries to provide safe forward visibility without excessive glare e Flash Headlights With Lock When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press the Flash Headlights with Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Doors amp Locks After pressing the Doors amp Locks soft key the following settings will be available e Auto Unlock on Exit When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press the Auto Unlock on Exit soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow sof
227. erior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has oc curred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The exterior lights will flash and the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or unlock any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch
228. ese conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4 L of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution 476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside
229. et seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing cool ant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483 When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine
230. etting This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks did Audio e Equalizer Press the Equalizer soft key to change this display When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale in between the and soft keys followed by pressing the arrow back soft key NOTE Bass mid treble allow the you to simply slide your finger up down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting e Balance Fade Press the Balance Fade soft key to change this display When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings e Speed Adjusted Volume Press the Speed Adjusted Volume soft key to change this display Decreases volume relative to vehicle speed To change the Spe
231. ext to the setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Clock After pressing the Clock soft key the following settings will be available e Sync Time with GPS When in this display you may automatically have the radio set the time To change the Sync Time setting press the Sync with GPS Time soft key until a check mark N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Set Time Hours When in this display you may adjust the hours The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection press the or soft keys to adjust the hours up or down Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or press the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Set Time Minutes When in this display you may adjust the minutes The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection press the or soft keys to adjust the minutes up or down Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or press the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Time Format When in this display you may select the time format display setting Press the Time Format soft key until a check mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key
232. ey Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim e For personal security and safety in the event of an panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors accident lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle set the ignition switch to the OFF position Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave ignition switch in the ACC or RUN positions A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Lock Switch 021835322 The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry system For further information refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle If you press the power door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the vehicle and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle Remov ing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to operate If a door is open and the ignition is in the LOCK or ACC pos
233. f either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 6 High Beam Indicator ED This indicator shows that the high beam head lights are on Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 7 Odometer Display Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster For further informati
234. f replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 10 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of I an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 WARNING ON RUN have the condition checked promptly A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you Certain conditions such as poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after en
235. fied SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPARS Engine Oil Filter or equivalent opark Plugs 3 6L Engine RER8ZWYCB4 Gap 0 031 in 0 79 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine LZFR5C 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection 3 6L Engine 87 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part pila Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed epa HM product Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting MS 1165 such as Fuchs EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s API GL 5 SAE 75W90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent API GL 5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent MOPAR Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 44 40 or equivalent MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Mi Maintenance Schedule 0 512 H Required Maintenance Intervals M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 512 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES xe MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
236. first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve A Call From Hold During an active call touch the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Swap soft key on the Phone main screen Only one call can be placed on hold at a time You can also press the amp button to toggle between the active and held phone call Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Conference soft key on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the button or the end soft key Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automati cally This is cell phone dependent Redial e Press the Redial soft key e or press the amp and after the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial Hi 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uc
237. form the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 515 8 000 Miles 13 000 km or 16 000 Miles 26 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 16 000 miles 26 000 km 7 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 8 000 miles 13 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 16 000 miles 26 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Auth
238. formation refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re The restraint must be appropriate for your child s straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy weight and height Check the label on the restraint for ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or weight and height limits fatal injury to the infant e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restrai
239. front map reading lights are mounted in the over head console UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 J z ia w 031433150 031433151 Front Map Reading Lights Front Map Reading Light Switches Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either side of the console These buttons are backlit for night time visibility To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE is pressed 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Ambient Light The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light feature This light casts illumination for improved visibil ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area m ul gt 033333449 Ambient Light Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open This includes the glove box light but not the trunk light To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch Dimmer Controls The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel Dimmer Switches With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the le
240. ft dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights Rotating the right dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the door handle lights map pockets and cupholders if equipped UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior Light Defeat OFF 3 Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer EVIC if equipped and radio when the park ing lights or headlights are on 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition switch is in the ON position The lever is located on the left side of the steering column l PUSH S2 S OFF Fa Windshield Wiper Washer Control Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation CAUTION Turn the windshield wipers off when dr
241. g with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can utilize the touch screen or press the VR button and say the word Send then the sequence you wish to enter For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 ft you can press the EVR button and say Send 3 7 4 6 f Saying Send followed by a number or sequence of numbers is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the GVR button and say for ex ample Send Voicemail password The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the
242. g Lights soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection press the Daytime Running Lights soft key select ON or OFF followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Flash Headlights with Lock Press the Flash Headlights with Lock soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press the Flash Head lights with Lock soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key Doors amp Locks e Auto Unlock on Exit Press the Auto Unlock on Exit soft key to change this display When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press the Auto Unlock on Exit soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Flash Lights with Lock Press the Flash Lights with Lock soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press the Flash Lights with L
243. g for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to an authorized dealer N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Customer Key Programming Prog
244. g the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE e Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur e Automatic Temperature Controls ATC will automati cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for filter replacement instructions 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Manual Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER HOT WEATHER AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS VERY HOT 0 WARM WEATHER LM COOL OR COLD HUMID CONDITIONS On 4 64650 de GOD COLD DRY CONDITIONS Te CONTROL SETTINGS Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mod
245. g through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you POWER STEERING Your vehicle is equipped with an electro hydraulic power steering system that will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving If the electro hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing power steering assist then the system will provide mechanical steering capability CAUTION Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering assistance in order to prevent damage to the system Normal operation will resume once the system is allowed to cool STARTING AND OPERATING 363 If the SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM el message and a flashing icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service It is likely the ve
246. gine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occu pants or others CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause 11 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation damage to the engine control system It also could Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator flashing severe catalytic converter damage and La Light in the instrument cluster will come on power loss will soon occur Immediate service is e when the ignition switch is turned to the required ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfuncti
247. h Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle TIRE CHAINS Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet capacity other than what was originally equipped SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load Proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain index could result in tire overloading and failure manufacturer Install tire chains only on P215 65R17 You could lose control and have a collision P225 60R18 and P235 55R18 size tires Refer to tirechain s com for more information Continued 394 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id NOTE Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Bro ken chains can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1 2 mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Continued CAUTION Continued e Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Use
248. h tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can utilize the touch screen or press the EVR button and say the word Send then the sequence you wish to enter For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 ft you can press the Sve button and say Send 3 7 4 6 Saying Send followed by a number or sequence of numbers is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the vr button and say for ex ample Send Voicemail password The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e The first number encountered for that contact will be sent All other numbers entered for that contact will be ignored e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature e Pauses wait or other characters that are supported by some
249. he Dial soft key e The Touch Tone screen will be displayed e Use the numbered soft keys to enter the number and touch Call To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition VR press the vr button while in a call and say 12344 or you can say Send Voicemail Password if Voicemail pass word is stored in your mobile phonebook Recent Calls You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the following call types e Incoming Calls e Outgoing Calls Missed Calls All Calls N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 These can be accessed by touching the recent calls soft key on the Phone main screen You can also press the amp button and say Show my incoming calls from any screen and the Incoming calls will be displayed NOTE Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing Recent or Missed Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will display a pop up on screen showing Answer or Ignore Press the Answer soft key or the S button on the steering wheel to accept the call Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Uconnect Phone will then interrupt the
250. he Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants A C Air Filter The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle next to the windshield wipers When installing a new filter ensure its proper orientation 1 Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips Y Access Door 2 Slide the lid on the filter adapter forward and down and remove the used filter 072610693 A C Air Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper 3 Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the maintenance intervals direction of airflow which is toward the rear of the vehicle text and arrows on the filter will indicate this 474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect again
251. he button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to de crease in 5 mph 8 km h increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h NOTE e When you use the SET button to decelerate if the engine s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle e The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop e The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill However a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal In addition downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending down hill This is normal operation and necessary to main tain set speed 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Setting The Following Distance In ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between 3 long 2 me dium and 1 short Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead This distance setting displays in the EVIC ACC 55 mph DISTANCE 3 032433101 Distance Set To change the distance setting press the
252. he detection zones Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points side rear front while driving to see if an alert is necessary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries Entering From The Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle Side Monitoring 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Entering From The Rear Overtaking Traffic Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative ofless than 10 mph 16 km h and the vehicle remains in speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h the blind spot for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning light will be illuminated If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph 16 km h the warning light will not illuminate Rear Monitoring UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Overtaking Approaching Overtaking Passing 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in berms etc However occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes on such objects This is n
253. he forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back NOTE For additional in
254. he instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation STARTING AND OPERATING 373 Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation a The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the ee Electronic Stability Control ESC is off OFF 374 STARTING AND OPERATING Synchronizing ESC If the power supply is interrupted battery 5 disconnected or discharged the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light may illuminate with the engine running If this should occur turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light should go out However if the light remains on have the ESC and BAS c
255. he multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective A Turn Signal On message will appear in the EVIC if equipped and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi 1 6 km with either turn signal on Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released Front Map Reading Lights The
256. he volume NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD AUX VES etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To
257. hecked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 1 U S DOT Safety Stan dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 054903773 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades NS TA TING AND OPERATING 375 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S e Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT
258. helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel NOTE The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter twice within five seconds Blacafd7 Trunk Release Button With the ignition switch in the ON RUN position the Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key removed from the ignition switch the Trunk Open sym bol will display until the trunk is closed 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Trunk Emergency Release Before Star
259. hicle for tether routing 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Folding Rear Seat After releasing the seatback it can be folded forward The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area To fold the rear seatback pull on the loops located on the upper seatback NOTE These loops can be tucked away when not in use When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap 030936862 Rear Seatback Loop NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirrors adjustable pedals if equipp
260. hicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this flammable and can explode injuring you Other time unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by t
261. hicle has lost power steering assistance Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information If the POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP mes sage and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature con dition no longer exists Once driving conditions are safe then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 364 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE e Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera tional it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers e f the condition persists see your authorized dealer for service MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS IF EQUIPPED 5 7L ENGINE ONLY This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE The MDS system may take some time to return to full functionali
262. hings To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Heated Seats e Auto Heated Seats Press the Auto Heated Seats soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C To make your selection press the Auto Heated Seats soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Engine Off Options e Easy Exit Seats Press the Easy Exit Seats soft key to change this display This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press the Easy Exit Seats soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Headlight Off Delay Press the Headlight Off Delay soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status press the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Engine Off Power Delay Press the Engin
263. hould be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Uconnect Voice Command VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M If no command is spoken or recorded the system with say one of three responses e didn t understand e I didn t get that etc If a command is not spoken or recorded a second time the system will respond with an error and give some direction as what can be said based on the context you are in After three consecutive failures of a spoken command or recording the VR session with end Pressing the Uconnect Voice Command Svea button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can say a command This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel or Help These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear
264. hrough your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Uconnect Phone Button The Uconnect Phone amp e Button is used to p o get into the phone mode and make calls show recent incoming outgoing calls view phone book etc When you press the button you will hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Uconnect Voice Command Button 7 The Uconnect Voice Command VR Button VR is only used for barge in and when you are already in a call and you want to send Tones or make another call The vn button is also used to access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command features if your vehicle is equipped Please see the Uconnect Voice Command section for direction on how to use the SVR button The Uconnect Pho
265. ht rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag or micro fiber towel A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth 494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning the Center Console Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console NOTE The cupholder cannot be removed FUSES Integrated Power Module The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment This module
266. iated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Push To Talk PTT button Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the button and say a command or say help All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the e button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu You can also press the or vr buttons when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu NOTE Pressing the amp e or 4vR buttons while the system is playing is known as Barging In refer to Barge In Overriding Prompts for further informa tion Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owners Ma
267. id skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability 370 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Brake Assist System BAS This system complements the ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency brake ma neuvers This system detects an emergency braking situ ation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefits of this system you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal p
268. ill disengage automatically after 10 seconds If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START ra STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will 348 STARTING AND OPERATING ee display a Vehicle Not In Park message and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position ENGINE START STOP Button Functions With Driver s Foot OFF the Brake Pedal In PARK or NEUTRAL Position The ENGINE START STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFE ACC RUN and START To change the ignition switch
269. ille To keep the ACC System operating properly it is impor tant to note the following maintenance items e Always keep the sensor clean Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 e Do not remove any screws from the sensor Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment e If the sensor is damaged due to a collision see your authorized dealer for service e Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor including transparent material or aftermarket grilles Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present the system will return to the Adaptive Cruise Control Off state and will resume function by simply reactivating it NOTE Installing a vehicle front end protector or an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recom mended Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC operation ACC Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error there may be a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions ACC will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating ACC again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized
270. in the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Checking Oil Level 5 7L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine 466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE See Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maxim
271. in on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shutdowns the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button NOTE The message Push Start Button will display in the EVIC until you push the START button DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock knob on each door Door Lock Knob trim panel downward Pull on the inside door handle ff the door lock knob is down when you shut the door release to unlock the door the door will lock Therefore make sure the K
272. ing Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Battery Location MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469 81342982 470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING WARNING Continued e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both ve
273. ing In Rear Cupholder 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE STORAGE Glovebox Storage The glovebox storage compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel R F m Opened Glovebox Storage Compartment Console Features The center console contains two shift bezel cubby bins with rubber mats for holding small items For vehicles not equipped with navigation radio the console also contains an extra storage bin located below the climate control which holds up to four CD jewel cases Glovebox Storage Compartment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 Two separate storage compartments are also located designed to hold various size coins A slot in the left and underneath the armrest right side of the top compartment provides clearance for y power cords to pass conveniently out of the bin with the lid closed This feature is ideal for games laptops mobile phones or other electrical equipment The console s front opening lid allows for easy access to these compartments 3 WARNING Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury 035335227 Center Console The top compartment holds small items such as a pen and note
274. ing as indicated Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR 418 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfac
275. ion This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC airbags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB to provide enhanced pro tection for an occupant during a side impact The SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats NOTE e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Airbag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag system components e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Airbag Warning Light e Steering Wheel and Column e Instrument Panel e Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag e Knee Impact Bolster e Driver Advanced Front Airbag e Passenger Advanced Front Airbag e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC e Front and Side Impact Sensor
276. ional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Indus try Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium Dut 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy 10 000 Ibs 4 540 Dut Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 423 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Max Tongue Wt See Wt Note 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 sq m 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the com
277. ir use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 536 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which a
278. is cycled from the OFF position NOTE None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position unless the overhead map reading lights are turned on manually 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the Panic Alarm from dis tances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit ter buttons for all RKE transmitters 021335339 Key Fob With RKE Transmitter To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button
279. ischarged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the dis charged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 450 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective CAUTIO
280. isture on the windshield To make your selection press the Rain Sensing soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Hill Start Assist When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection press the Hill Start Assist soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Lights After pressing the Lights soft key the following settings will be available e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status press the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Headlight Illumination on Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status press the or soft key to select your desired time interval Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 e Headlights with Wi
281. itch 194 Hitches Taner TOWING Sint xor dus an BES senna doe aa 422 Holder Coin 43 tease Be vc GRA ESE DER 262 lokke CUD ser ache rt toesaeerae tees dp 259 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 246 Hood Release 22x33 md 4 ESSE EE 188 Ignition PITT 12 TCC EAUS esse dete RED EE ase Ge 19 Immobilizer Sentry Key si sa Re rb aus 15 Infant Restraint as crearsi ack Be aia uae 3 vb EP Information Center Vehicle aaaea 283 Inside Rearview Mirror SS SS SS SS ss 96 Instrument Cluster EE ES ES SS SS 273 Instrument Panel and Controls 271 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 493 Integrated Power Module Fuses 494 Interior Appearance Care zs suse xb d ARE 492 lnternor TOSES MP 494 liteit LIONE pau aude Ey EC EE tae AE e 196 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 198 Ji elek lei eo AAR OR AO EO ee EE 4 Jack LOCAHOM 3444 45 46 N hee ee eee IS 436 Jack ODeIAUON 445 54 542855 1608 d dE B OR ER 439 N INDEX 547 Jacking INSUMCHONS x 2s quet RE ER EER 439 JUMP DEERE eek SPAR ERA DAE HR EED i 446 Kevin Reminder as ee ee cube me Poncio DRS oes 14 ke dop Eve d bok a bur a dede ae uicit d 08 17 Key Replacement 2 uude sceqanig ge ta KERR KOS 16 Key Sentry immobilizer 4 925 es 2 um dus 15 Keyless Enter N Go leere 32 347 Keyless Entry SE ao cb ane HE REDE Wee a MK 20 ultor 12 INCVS Sagoo dq EE ET HOLTE oS Hee Ses 12 Kicker Sound System lt ts 642454
282. ith each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seatcover material Then rotate the tether anchor age cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions For center seating position route the tether strap over the seatback and adjustable headrest with the headrest in the full down position then attach the hook to the tether anchor located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window Adjustable Headrest Release Push Button N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
283. ition a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor dance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed Child Protection Door Lock System Rear returned to 0 mph 0 km h Doors P To provide a safer environment for small children riding 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with 4 The driver door is opened Child Protection Door Lock system 5 The doors were not previously unlocked To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection 6 The vehicle speed is 0
284. its A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag The trim cover separates and folds out of the way allowing the airbag to inflate to the full size The airbag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag gas is vented through small vent holes in the side of airbag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This especially applies to children 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC airbags depending o
285. iver Side Knee Airbag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occu pant protection Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts proper
286. iving through an automatic car wash Damage to the wind shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than off Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to the first detent position and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are four delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km h or less Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of th
287. k handle counterclockwise 10 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft lb 135 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 11 Stow the jack tools and flat tire Make sure the base of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 444 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Wheel Cover Or Center Cap Installation If Equipped NOTE Do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare 1 Mount the road tire on the axle For vehicles equipped with wheel covers perform Steps 2 and 3 For vehicles equipped with center caps proceed to Step 4 2 Install two lug nuts on the mounting studs which are on each side of the stud that is in alignment with the valve stem Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end Su po umso tud of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts Tire and Wheel Cover Or Center Cap To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not i 1 Valve Stem 4 Wheel Cover tighten the lug nuts
288. k Download Automatic Phonebook EN Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone e Touch the Delete Device soft key Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Making A Phone A Favorite Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e The options pop up will be displayed e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen e Touch the Phone soft key e To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name e Touch the Options soft key then touch the next to section the appropriate device to be disconnected Touch the Settings soft key The options pop up will be displayed 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently connecte
289. keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortab
290. l and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 88 000 miles 143 000 km M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 522 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 96 000 Miles 156 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 96 000 miles 156 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs 3 6L Engine Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive AWD change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the transfer case fluid All Wheel Drive AWD L C OOO C C C C
291. l can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485 Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main WARNING Continued taining Your Vehicle for further information e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that WARNING has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling poi
292. l free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 WARNING POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured Do not
293. la i hear all 18 defined 4 Messaging commands work if the Ucomeect system is equipped with His are and ws mabie phone supports maceaging over Blue Tooth Lot D Enter in contact nares and phone type Note Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and are underlined in the green shaded boxes 030536630 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation UCONNECT VOICE COMMAND 8 4 8 4 Nav Uconnect Voice Command System Operation i The Uconnect Voice Command system al ti VR lows you to control your AM FM radio satel lite radio disc player SD Card USB iPod and Sirius Travel Link NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws All attention s
294. lapper door while refueling 416 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id NOTE Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches WARNING allowing the flapper door to open e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled 6 Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula 5 Fill the vehicle with fuel when the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full NOTE A funnel is provided located in the trunk in the spare tire area to open the flapper door to allow for emergency refueling with a gas can tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling CAUTION To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release If you are unable to open the fuel filler door use the fuel filler door emergency release 1 Open the trunk 2 Pull the release cable located on the driver s side ee STARTING AND OPERATING 417 VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage load
295. lation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability ee STARTING AND OPERATING 393 WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read sion components You could lose control and have ings a collision resulting in serious injury or deat
296. lay position 4 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Setting 4 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE e The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high speed position e The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind shield e Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms and will not operate under the following conditions e Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is first turned ON the Rain Sensing system will not N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tem perature is greater than 32 F 0 C e Transmission in NEUTRAL Position When the ignition is ON and the transmission is in the NEU TRAL position the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position NOTE Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch
297. le simply press the button and say a command or say help All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the e button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu You can also press the or vr buttons when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu NOTE Pressing the or 4vR buttons while the system is playing is known as Barging In refer to Barge In Overriding Prompts for further information Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owners Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing NOTE e You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to complete this procedure N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 e The vehicle must be in Park 3 Select Yes to begin the pairing process Then search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name 2 If there is no phone currently connected with the and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen system a pop up will appear 1 Press the Phone soft key on the screen to begin e If No is selected touch the settings
298. le Info Messages Stored Warning Messages Turn Menu OFF 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering Press and release the UP button to scroll up wheel N wad through the main menus Fuel Economy Vehicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Messages Units System Setup and sub menus DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the main menus and sub menus SELECT Button Press and release the SELECT button for access to main menus sub menus or to select a 040909599 personal setting in the setup menu Press and uM hold the SELECT button for two seconds to reset features EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 BACK Button Press the BACK button to scroll back to a BACK previous menu or sub menu Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays The EVIC display consists of four sections 1 The top line where compass direction and outside temperature are displayed 2 The main display area where the menus and pop up messages are displayed 3 The vehicle odometer line 4 The reconfigurable telltales section below the odom eter line The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu The main display area also displays pop up messages that consist of approximately 60 possi
299. le could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control ACC increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways However it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING WARNING Continued Cannot take street traffic and weather conditions system It is not a substitute for active driving into account and may be limited upon adverse sight involvement It is always the driver s responsibil distance conditions ity to be attentive of road traffic and weather Does not predict the lane curvature or the move conditions vehicle speed distance to the vehicle ment of preceding vehicles and will not compensate ahead and most importantly brake operation to for such changes ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions Your complete attention is always re conditions which can result in wrong or missing quired while driving to maintain safe control of distance warnings your vehicle Failure to follow these warnings can Can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s result in a collision or serious perso
300. le in all types of weather This system can be operated through either the Automatic Climate Controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect Touch system display When the Uconnect Touch system is in different modes En y Radio Player Settings More etc the driver and pas senger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the display General Overview EE Hard Keys Hard keys are located on the left and right side of the Uconnect Touch 4 3 screen in the center of the instru ment panel There are also hard keys located below the Uconnect Touch screen Uconnect Touch System 4 3 Hard key 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3 2 A Blue 10 10 se ph NITY ira Front Rear B Syne A C CE yl Slimate OFF My D OOO 2 mae Automatic Climate Controls Banas ATC Uconnect Touch System 4 3 Manual Temperature Shown Controls Soft keys Soft Keys Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch system screen UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 If equipped with ATC performing this function will cause the automatic operation to switch into manual mode and the AUTO indicator will turn off 2 Recirculation Control Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 3 Blower Control ru Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system The
301. le to feel pain to the skin CAUTION because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued Front Heated Seat Operation Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch 4 3 Press the CLIMATE hard key located next to the Uconnect Touch display to enter the climate control screen aj select HI level heating Press the soft key a second time to select LO level heating Press the soft key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF Press the Driver or Pass seat soft key lo cated on the Uconnect Touch display once to Front Heated Seat Operations Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch 8 4 and 8 4 Nav Press the Controls soft key located on the Uconnect Touch display UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key once to select HI level heating Press the soft key a second time to select LO level heating Press the soft key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the HI level setting is
302. least 5 minutes Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE e When the ambient temperature is above 90 F 32 C you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 and Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer re quires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 414 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in th
303. lected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start After pressing the Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start soft key the following settings will be available e Horn with Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection press the Sound Horn with Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto on Driver Heated Seat amp Steering Wheel with Vehicle Start When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C To make your EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 selection press the Auto Heated Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Engine Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options soft key the fol lowing settings will be available e Easy Exit Seat This feature provides automa
304. lectrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations WARNING Continued e Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for ad ditional space between your vehicle and the ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision gt O Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring O C Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size 4 gt O stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety ot Oa O The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har 057003766 ness and connector Four Pin Connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles 1 Female Pins 4 Park i 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn wiring harness P 5 E 3 Ground 6 Right Stop Turn 430 STARTING AND OPERATING O CN O O O o Seven Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range
305. limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 406 STARTING AND OPERATING M 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a mini mum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Indu
306. lision Warning If Equipped ll Parksense Rear Park Assist If Equipped O Parksense Sensors 228 230 233 O Parksense Warning Display O Parksense Display O Enabling And Disabling Parksense O Service The Parksense Rear Park Assist System O Cleaning The Parksense System O Parksense System Usage Precautions ll Parkview Rear Back Up Camera If EQUID OE 54245454 bas ee et bt ER O Turning Parkview On Or Off With Touch Screen Radio Bl Overhead Console O Courtesy Reading Lights O Sunglasses Storage 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie lll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 246 B Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 254 E Programming Homel ink ss vss ins ce 35 247 EDI iek Protec Feabite satus ea dioe erp HE 254 O Gate Operator Canadian Programming 250 O Venting Sunroof Express 255 OUsing HomeLink xao RR YES 251 O Sunshade Operation sls 255 H Reprogramming A Single HomeLink AVG UCN o eyes 2 greed RADE DR EER DE 255 EE EE EE EE nnn e O Sunroof Maintenance 255 Security cese e n nnne E EL Ignition Off Operation 4 4 0 4 eoe eicere ed 255 bl Troubleshooting Tips essers iem pep dead 252 3 Sunroof Fully Closed sess 256 O General Information 292m Electrical Power Outlets eese LG 256 W Power Sunroof If Equipped aoe IM Cupholders i see enne caress 259 O Opening
307. ll passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 538 INDEX NEE Id About Your Brakes ABS Anti Lock Brake System Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cruise Control 209 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 480 lelie Fuel 22a wx 3 ded RR ED Vie q Ets 415 Adding Washer FU 2a e opo tope dne 475 Additives Fuel 4 ia see dane ES pees ee 410 Adjustable Pedals ii eint pe bee oe een ee gee 204 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 468 Air Conditioner Maintenance 471 sur C ondiHonine FIGE s voee sape 2 2 dod ecco oa 339 472 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 471 472 Air Conditioning System 337 471 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 340 Air Pressure Tires 0000000000 385 Dur 2a Ven oe ek ee eee eee ees 54 66 Arbad DEDIOVMIENE sis ke kn ane a 44 goes x93 67 AirDap Light a ee ee sedeti 63 64 69 85 279 Airbag Maintenance oi nce od RR RR ED EK Hb d 68 ADAS ide isc 99x90 323x599 RP 58 62 65 66 Airbag Window Side Curtain 58 62 66 Alarm S c rity Alarm a quu puce tere eee ES us 17 Alarm LENE soseer ied DERE S RC PR oA 279 Alarm System Security Alarm 17 Alarm Panic oen REGS 5 64 9 99x 3X HAHA 22 All Wheel Drive AWD 358 488 Alter
308. ll Controls The touch screen allows you to control the following call features e Answer e End e Ignore e Hold unhold Mute unmute e Transfer the call to from the phone e Swap 2 active calls e Conference join 2 active calls together Touch Tone Number Entry e Touch the Phone soft key e Touch the Dial soft key N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 e The Touch Tone screen will be displayed 68 af P FM 91 7 DOE Pee STER e Use the numbered soft keys to enter the number and Recent calle gt All Cal X touch Call E Ana Conda To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition VR press inooming Axel Schwelss the Sve button while in a call and say Send 1234 or MERE Buddy s Pizza you can say Send Voicemail Password if Voicemail Fue raten password is stored in your mobile phonebook James Buttler D Dennett Recent Calls You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the following call types e Incoming Calls e Outgoing Calls e Missed Calls e All Calls 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M These can be accessed by touching the recent calls soft key on the Phone main screen You can also press the button and say Show my incoming calls from any screen and the Incoming calls will be displayed NOTE Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing Recent or Missed Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receiv
309. ll eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you cycle the ignition to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Cycle the ignition to the OFF position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure F
310. lly when the engine is cold e If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to press the ENGINE START STOP button to return to the OFF position before restarting Transmission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after restart if the ignition is not turned to the OFF position first 352 STARTING AND OPERATING ee e The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating Therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the break in period This is a normal condition and pre cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the brake pedal must be firmly pressed before the shift lock will release Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive The vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift lever is in the DRIVE or REVERSE position WARNING Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the transmission into PARK press the ENGINE START STOP button to turn off the engine and apply the parking
311. lo or a RNING Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the ignition in the ACC or RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Automatic Transmission The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear NS 1AH TING AND OPERATING 347 Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment Normal Starting Using the ENGINE START STOP Button NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To start the engine the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL Press and hold the brake pedal while press ing the ENGINE START STOP button once The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter w
312. lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone OFF ON Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Uconnect Hands Free Calling Uconnect Hands Free Calling The commands can be spoken from any screen after pushing the connect Phone button Available commands while phone call is in progress The commands can be spoken from any screen while a call is active after pushing ihe Uconnect voice command button Call John Smith jaj Noes Mobile TER Redial Shows the phonebook Dial Tones entry for John for 12344 Smith with all are sent Last Last number or incoming Incoming Phonebook phone number or call list will screen will dialed is phoneis be shown redialed dial Dial Tones for numbers stored in Voicemail password are sent Notes 1 You can replace John Smith with amy name in your mobile or favorites phone book You can also say Call John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to call for John Smath 2 You can replace Mobile with Home Work ar Other 3 You can replace Incoming calle with oulgoing calls missed calls or all call
313. ly The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or si
314. ly two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 20 O D Overdrive OFF Indicator Light o D This light will illuminate when the O D OFF button has been selected and overdrive has been turned off 21 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first tumed to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information 22 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
315. may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 530 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN e
316. me e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months which ever comes first N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 513 Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level Refer to Maintenance Procedures Engine Oil in Maintaining Your Ve hicle for further information e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder and power steering and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 514 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES xe CAUTION Failure to per
317. me of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts the transmission is most likely operating in the Limp Home Mode In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate Sec ond gear will operate in the DRIVE position The Mal function Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated If the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears To reset the trans mission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever to the PARK position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 3 Turn OFF the engine 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Move the shift lever to the desired range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation If the transmission cannot be reset see your authorized dealer NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
318. ment panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features Hard Keys Hard keys are located on the left and right side of the Uconnect Touch 4 3 screen Soft Keys Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch screen Uconnect Touch 4 3 Settings Customer Programmable Features In this mode the Uconnect Touch system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Heated Seats Engine Off Operation Compass Settings Audio Phone Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup through hard keys and soft keys NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time Press the Settings hard key to access the Settings screen use the Page Up Down soft keys to scroll through the following settings Touch the desired setting soft key to change the setting using the description shown on the following pages for each setting UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 Settings Mc Display Please Clock select a setting Safety Assistance Exit Lights dc 1 Uconnect Touch 4 3 Settings Hard key Uconnect Touch 4 3 Soft keys Display 044336083 e Brightness Press the Brightness soft key to change this display When in this display you may select display brightness with the headlights on and the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M
319. mirror and extends ap proximately 20 ft 6 m to the rear of the vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE e The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones e The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow ice and dirt road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects bum per stickers bicycle racks etc The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 The BSM system can also be configured to sound an audible chime alert and mute the radio to notify the driver of objects that have entered t
320. n A check mark will appear to show your selection Phone And Network Status Indicators Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength and phone battery strength Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice command N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone simply touch the Mute button
321. n impact event e All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In an accident you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause an accident that in
322. n in all acci dents and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of I the airbag system whenever the ignition is in the ON RUN position If the key is in the OFF position or in the ACC position the airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it o Y 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the airbag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on s
323. n the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforce ment could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is
324. n the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition is cycled off N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE ST
325. nal injury braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a The ACC system complete stop Does not react to pedestrians oncoming ve hicles and stationary objects i e a stopped ve hicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle Continued e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC is a convenience N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 WARNING The Cruise Control system has two control modes You should switch off the ACC system e Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an b appropriate distance between vehicles e When driving in fog heavy rain heavy snow sleet heavy traffic and complex driving situations Normal fixed speed cruise control mode is for cruis e g in highway construction zones ing at a constant preset speed For additional informa When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp tion refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control when driving on roads that are winding icy Mode in this section snow covered slippery or have steep uphill or downhill slopes When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury NOTE The system will not react to preceding vehicles Always be aware of the mode selected You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons The two control modes function differently Always confirm
326. nd correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment e Owner s Manuals IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Se These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at Or 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 535 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of the
327. nd the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF To change the Park Assist status press and release the Off Sound Only or Sounds and Display button followed by pressing the arrow back soft key Refer to Rear Park Assist System in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for system function and operating information e Tilt Mirrors In Reverse When this feature is selected the outside sideview mir rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the RE VERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection press the Tilt Mirrors in Reverse soft key until a check mark appears next to N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Blind Spot Alert When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off Lights or Lights and Chime The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode when this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is activated the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when th
328. nding follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury 1 Remote Positive Post 2 Remote Negative Post Preparations For Jump Start The battery is stored under an access cover in the trun Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the engine compartment for jump starting y Remote Battery Posts 448 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ee WARNINGE its 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park WARNING the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by WARNING moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can bu
329. ndividually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets e Bi Level Mode gt Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets NOTE BI LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets u NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 e Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets e Mix Mode We Air comes from the floor defrost and side window vel demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions e Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side win dow defrosting and defogging When the defrost mode is selected the blower level may increase NOTE For Manual Climate Controls while operating in other airflow modes than Defrost the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side
330. ne is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts There are two general meth ods for how Voice Command works 1 Say compound commands like Call John Smith mo bile 2 Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Listen prompt or an other prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Call and then John Smith and then mobile the following com pound command can be said Call John Smith mo bile e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Search for John Smith or you can break the combined form
331. ng your recent Incoming SMS Sending a text message via the touch screen Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the touch screen Pairing up to 10 phones audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly via Bluetooth for messaging features to work properly Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone For Uconnect customer support call e For Chrysler vehicles call 1 800 247 9753 e For Dodge vehicles call 1 800 423 6343 e For Jeep vehicles call 1 877 426 5337 e For Ram Truck vehicles call 1 866 726 4636 For a list of compatible phones see the Uconnect websites e www chrysler com crossbrand uconnect chrysler interface html N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 e www chrysler com crossbrand uconnect dodge interface html e www chrysler com crossbrand uconnect jeep interface html Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death The Uconnect Phone is driven t
332. nnect Phone button Available commands while phone call is in progress The commands can be spoken from any screen while a call is active after pushing the pce voice command button Call John Smith Mobile NN Shows the number or i ing i Phonebook phonebook i Dial Tones phone j call list will screen will entry for John for 12344 dialed is phone is be shown Smith with all are sent redialed dial Dial Tones for numbers stored in Voicemail password are sent associated with entry is dialed Notes 1 You can replace John Smith with amy name in your mobile or favorites phone book You can also say Call John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to call for Jahn Smith 2 You can replace Mobile with Home Work or Other 3 You can replace Incoming calle with oulgoing calls missed calls or all calls 4 You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone 5 These commands can be used during a phone call after pushing the connect voice command bulton insert talking head icon on the steering wheel Please nate the call will be mubed while ihe VR session is active 8 Send dial tones for automaned systems m available while a call is active 7 Stoning Chal lones in contact names is possible bul only the first number encountered in a contact name will be sent For example if there is a number stored in the Home and Work numbers for the con
333. nnection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC i 11D481 126 AC Third Edition Printed in U S A
334. nt e Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard information Using the wrong type of brake fluid or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylin der reservoir Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be Continued taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued 486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE See WARNING Continued e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture Automatic Transmission Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants
335. nt manufacturer s directions N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 WARNING When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE All three rea
336. ntenance is recommended by the manufacturer 114 Months Maintenance to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions Service Schedule warranty L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter _I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of WARNING irregular wear even if it occurs before 152 000 miles 247 000 km e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your prd per D P 529 O Prepare For The Appointment 529 df te dies Hi 46444 fevered apne ade DI 529 o Be Reasonable With Requests 529 W if You Need Assistance 529 H Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 530 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 530 O In Mexico Contact lt 2 244 xu D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 531
337. nto the lane There will not be suffi where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and cient distance to the vehicle ahead the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M General Information FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems Classification Specifications 47 C ER Part 15 47 C ER Part 15 515 Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode a normal fixed speed Cruise Control mode is available for cruis ing at fixed speeds The normal Cruise Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requir ing the driver to operate the accelerator Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h To change modes press the MODE button when the system is in either the OFF READY or SET position Cruise Ready will be displayed if the system was in ACC READY or ACC SET position Cruise Off will be displayed if the system was in the ACC OFF position To switch back to Adaptive Cruise Control mode press the MODE button a second time WARNING In the normal Cruise Control mode the system will not react to vehicles ahead In addition the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle to
338. nual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing NOTE e You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to complete this procedure N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 e The vehicle must be in Park 1 Press the Settings hard key to begin 2 Press the Phone soft key 3 If there is no phone currently paired with the system a pop up will appear 4 Select Yes to begin the pairing process Then search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen e If No is selected touch the settings soft key from the Uconnect Phone main screen e Touch the Add Device soft key e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen 5 Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting 6 When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range NOTE For phones which are not made a favorite the phone priority is determined by the order in which it was paired the latest phone paired will have the higher priority You can also use the foll
339. nuals 0 0 cee eee ee 533 Shift Lever Override e vans qeu taco N dn ve De 4 452 ODE ii shaves wee AK ey EE eee ORE ERROR se 350 Automatic Transmission 350 353 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 48 Shoulder Belts s is ke ind EEN ERR ARE EE DE aa 42 PIdE UIDES aa hed RUNE ES TRES PECIA EP 65 5iendls TU sos ineens EE chee EE Oe es 87 193 273 Slippery Surfaces Driving On eser RES 359 SmartBeams 4 oa m BOE ESSE HES RR ERS 190 554 INDEX M Snow Chains Tire Chains LL 393 Steering nein MP 295 Columm CODBOIS xu 64445 e643 HORE MR DEE oS 193 Sound System Colm LOCK Jouve cheese a qub eue ber eq d MS 201 le MEE SERS EER eee nes T 325 lor A 363 pare ie 3 gr uma ER AU PURSE X SE 388 389 436 TP COMM 2 sea ead 4 OOR AAS AT 201 202 Park TGs amp spine ee teas LORRIE REDE N EA RS 508 Wheel Hele oos as Oe KLEE HA ere oe ode 203 Specifications Wheel HE 26 nese ono 6 weke SE Rabie 201 202 Fuel Gasoline ee eee 407 508 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 326 I eean a sete d vet 508 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound Speed Control Cruise Control 206 209 System CODLTOIS eresas ease daea Saeed eae 326 PEO eerte eA EEEa 2 0 N a dies EEES 262 503 U eaae 24 346 Storage Vehicle vsus oa bee BEER RE 339 503 Automatic Transmission acs oes ne KAR c9 s 346 Storing YOUR Veide sts auos ER a asemaa tmh 503 Cold cu egadta EE AL RE ee ee 525 lek eel oes a4 Co
340. o not cover the lens 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights and storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door Opener HomeLink buttons and power sunroof switch may also be included if equipped 033435219 Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights At the forward end of the console are two courtesy reading lights 031435217 Overhead Reading Lights Press the lens to turn on the light Press it a second time to turn off the light N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 These lights also turn on when a door is opened when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent Sunglasses Storage At the front of the overhead console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses 033435222 Sunglass Storage Compartment 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie The storage compartment access is a push push de sign Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open Push on the raised bar to close 033435223 Opened Storage Compartment GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit opera
341. ock soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Sounds Horn with Lock Press the Sounds Horn with Lock soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the horn will chirp when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selection press the Sounds Horn with Lock soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Sound Horn with Remote Start Press the Sound Horn with Remote Start soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection press the Sound Horn with Remote Start soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Remote Door Unlock Order Press the Remote Door Unlock Order soft key to change this display When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry and the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors 1st Press all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If
342. oft key followed by pressing the arrow back soft key NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification e Rain Sensing Press the Rain Sensing soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press the Rain Sensing soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Hill Start Assist Press the Hill Start Assist soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M and operating information To make your selection press the Hill Start Assist soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key Lights e Headlight Off Delay Press the Headlight Off Delay soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status press the 0 30 60 o
343. ole Fluid Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Rear Axle For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Change Axle Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489 Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on
344. ompart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Multi Displacement System MDS Re fer to Multi Displacement System in Starting and Operating for further information Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engi neered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives 468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection
345. on Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 12 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con trol ESC is off ee OFF 13 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 14 Fuel Door Reminder The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the lt Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the vehicle 15 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 16 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds 9 as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving then have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 17 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE e You must
346. on rear wheels only Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave ment Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufac turer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacture NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instruc tions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 395 Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer sug gest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter All season tires satisfy this require ment and can be identified by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer
347. on refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 8 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ies ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 9 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided l should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TP
348. on the Phone main screen Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Voice Command e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac
349. on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through Uconnect Touch M To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie turned on or turned off To change the curren
350. onnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF NOTE the call will remain within the vehicle audio system until the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth connection It is recommended to press the transfer soft key when leaving the vehicle Uconnect Phone Features Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call Emergency or Dial Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The Emergency call may also be initiated by touch e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your NOTE chances of successfully making a phone call as to that e The towing assistance call may also be initiated by for the mobile phone directly WARNINCG Your phone must be turned on and paired to the U
351. ontain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or belts out of the area N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damag
352. oping Switch To tilt the steering column move the lever up or down as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 transmitter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the tilt telescopic steering column to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Unders
353. or headlight glare from vehicles behind you 030407085 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 030436523 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Outside mirrors are hinged allowing the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Driver s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped The driver s outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This featur
354. or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required WARNING e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477 CAUTION e The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly
355. orized Chrysler Dealer 516 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 24 000 Miles 39 000 km or 32 000 Miles 52 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J _1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 32 000 miles 52 000 km L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Replace the engine air cleaner filter irregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the air conditioning filter 24 000 miles 39 000 km Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect the CV joints Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect exhaust system Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for front axle fluid All Wheel Drive damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary AWD Inspect the transfer case fluid AII Wheel Drive AWD M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 517 40 000 Miles 65 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Sch
356. ormal operation and your vehicle does not require service Opposing Traffic Stationary Objects N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 WARNING The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicy clists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system always check your vehicle s mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your turn signal before changing lanes Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Rear Cross Path The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended to aid the drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected alert the driver RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to 2 mph 1 km h to 3 km h to objects moving a maxi mum of approximately 10 mph 16 km h such as in parking lot situations 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Ina parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are
357. ory settings by pressing the SET S button followed by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 above 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Memory Position Recall NOTE e The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory posi tions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will display in the EVIC if equipped e The driver s seat belt must be unbuckled to recall memory positions To recall the memory settings for driver 1 press MEMORY button number 1 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver 2 press MEMORY button number 2 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons S 1 or 2 on the driver s door during a recall When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped stop mov ing A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle The distance the driver s seat moves depends on where you have the driver s seat positioned when you remove the Key Fob from the ignition
358. otor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 Or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group 534 LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find a
359. ovides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 8 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON OFF 9 AUTO Operation Button If Equipped Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Refer to Automatic Operation for more information 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 10 Driver Temperature Control Down Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automati cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 11 Driver Temperature Control Up Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for warmer temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automati cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 12 Modes The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets demist outlets and defrost outlets The Mode settings are as follows e Panel Mode gt gt Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be i
360. owed by pressing the arrow back soft key Refer to Rear Park Assist System in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle for system func tion and operating information e Tilt Mirrors in Reverse Press the Tilt Mirrors in Reverse soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the outside rear view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the REVERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 out of REVERSE To make your selection press the Tilt Mirrors in Reverse soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Blind Spot Alert Press the Blind Spot Alert soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off Lights or Lights and Chime The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode when this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is activated the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deactivated To change the Blind Spot Alert status press the Off Lights or Lights amp Chime s
361. owing VR commands to bring up the Paired Phones screen from any screen on the radio e Show Paired Phones or e Connect My Phone 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device Touch the Player hard key to begin Press the Source soft key Change the Source to Bluetooth Touch the Add Device soft key Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled audio device When prompted on the device enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device Selecting Yes will make this device the highest priority This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range NOTE If No is selected device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest device paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR command to bring up a list of paired audio devices e Show Paired Audio Devices Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Device Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority paired phone within range If you would need to choose a particular phone or device follow the steps e Touch the Settings hard key e Touch the Phone soft key e Touch to select the
362. p keep Press the Hot symbol once to activate the cupholder press the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder WARNING When using the cupholder in the Heat position avoid contact with the heated portion of the cup holder in order to reduce the possibility of burns Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin warm beverages warm and cold beverages cool because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injuries medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise par ticular care in order to prevent serious burn injury Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects l when operated in the Heat position Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 Rear Seat Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side by side to provide conve nient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant s elbows Su 035137960 Rear Seat Cupholders Lighted Cupholders If Equipped On some vehicle the rear cupholders are equipped with a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear passengers The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer Control Refer to Lights in Understanding The M tures Of Your Vehicle for further information Sub 035137959 Light R
363. p oes pes 502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse S E E ee dia imm Natural Red E EE EE 66 Fuse Spare Fuse Fuse Spare are Blue Sunshade gee 69 Fuse Spare Fuse Spare _70 Fuse Spare Fuse Spare N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503 VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take these steps to protect your battery e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Rear Courtesy Reading Lamps W5W Rear Compartment Irunk Lamp 562 Overhead Console Reading Lamp 578 Vibor Vanity Lampe suce dto i 33 gor penes A6220 Glove Box Lamp If Equipped 194 Door COUPIOSV 1 222 3 8 10 How SR ded 562 Shift Indicator Lamp s lt ee ehh JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket Cupholder LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions All of the interior bulbs
364. pad while the larger bottom compartment will hold CDs and alike The bottom compartment also con tains a 12 Volt power outlet and a molded in coin holder 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Door Storage Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped with 60 40 The door panels contain storage areas Split Folding Rear Seat The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters When the seats are folded down they provide a continuous nearly flat extension of the load floor When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into Front Door Trim Storage position If the seatback is not securely locked into 035235231 position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injuty Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265 WARNING Continued WARNING e The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system e To help p
365. particular phone or device and touch Connect Device e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Disconnecting A Device Touch the Settings hard key Touch the Phone soft key Touch to select the device Touch the Disconnect Device soft key Deleting A Device e Touch the Settings hard key e Touch the Phone soft key e Touch to select the device Touch the Delete Device soft key Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Making A Phone A Favorite e Touch the Settings hard key e Touch the Phone soft key e Touch to select the device to make a Favorite am NOTE You will see the chosen device move to the top of the list e Touch the Make Favorite soft key e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth
366. pers When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press the Headlights with Wipers soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto Dim High Beams When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection press the Auto High Beams soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Daytime Running Lights When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection press the Daytime Running Lights soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Steering Directed Lights When this feature is selected the headlights turn relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel To make your selection press the Ste
367. placement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or a 2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 021337430 3 Remove the battery by turning the back cover over battery facing downward and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar then replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the new 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This de
368. position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the Key Fob Occupants particularly unattended children can be come entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may re sult in serious injury or death N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 AUTO Down Feature The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an AUTO down feature Press the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go down automati cally To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the AUTO down operation pull up on the switch briefly AUTO Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back
369. positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps e Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position e Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVIC displays ACC e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a second time to change the ignition switch to the RUN position EVIC displays RUN e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time to return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC displays OFF Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 349 If Engine Fails To Start Clearing a Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press and hold the brake pedal push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button once The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10 seconds and then disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle bod
370. ptimized for front seat passengers for any audio source This surround effect is available for audio from any source AM FM CD Satellite Radio or AUX and is activated through the Uconnect Touch system For further information refer to Uconnect Touch System in Understanding Your Instrument Panel DSS modes for audio sources are Stereo and Audio Surround which is surround sound equalized for the front seat occupants The Video Surround mode is described under Driver Selectable Surround DSS The Video Surround Mode will only be available for video media sources DVDs Video CDs or other video media supported by the radio Some audio will sound better in DSS modes others in Stereo mode 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL When in Audio Surround mode balance is set auto matically Fader control is available in surround mode but should be set to the center position for optimal surround performance STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches on 045035190 Remote Sound System Controls The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease t
371. quipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the light 030434976 Illuminated Vanity Mirror BLIND SPOT MONITORING IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar based sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to detect highway licensable vehicles automobiles trucks motorcycles etc that enter the blind spot zones from the rear front side of the vehicle UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Landi n IN h 030405533 Rear Detection Zones When the vehicle is started the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle 11 ft or 3 35 m The zone starts at the outside rear view
372. quipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupants mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupants mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle
373. r when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two available operating modes ESC On This is the normal operating mode for the ESC When ever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving conditions The ESC should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs Partial Off The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired It is also intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the threshold for ESC activation which allows for more wheel spin than what ESC normally allows The ESC Off switch is located on the switch bank in the center of the instrument panel To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily press the ESC Off switch and the 372 STARTING AND OPERATING ee ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will illu WARNING minate To turn the ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch and the ESC Activation Malfunction The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre Indicator Light will turn off vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from excessive spee
374. r 90 soft key followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Illuminated Approach Press the Illuminated Approach soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status press the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Headlights with Wipers Press the Headlights with Wipers soft key to change this display When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press the Headlights with Wipers soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Auto High Beams Press the Auto High Beams soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection press the Auto High NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 Beams soft key select ON or OFF followed by pressing the arrow back soft key Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Daytime Running Lights Press the Daytime Runnin
375. r na ede Red tag BE EO 450 kosme Falls ie SIG oie ein ea germ saan sa O42 DUN ROOL soo RA DEE 34 RD HEES RE eae 253 ROMO MCCC 24 Sunglasses Storag sssrds ve care nes ba HARE 245 btar ng and Operating 4540646485665 aX oe 346 Sunroof Maintenance 005 255 barn Pioeei ies seess xus PRSE RT P S PA 346 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 54 Sway Contool Maler 2446256 643046 Kaw duos 420 N INDEX 555 ties Eie OM Es sau ES AO VR Y RD 467 Dystem Remote STINE aoo do MA OS os 24 Tac ROME P 279 Telescoping Steering Column 201 202 Temperature Control Automatic ATC Do Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 281 435 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 75 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 Theft System Security Alarm uae e en 17 TNC Steering COMI vi scena esa Cee iva d 201 202 Tune Delay Headlight assos dx x RR der re 191 Tire and Loading Information Placard 380 Tire Identification Number TIN 378 die EDD LL 374 Tue Safety Information sess si 4e Aet des poca 374 1E vm 87 384 535 Aoine Lile OL Hie PET so aay ES EE 391 Ait Pressure ses EER MEER ka E bR EIS 384 Clams 226252425264 OE en oben ee TURA eee 393 GESIE soes RE BESEER LERE es ARE 436 439 Be Ee eaten vars OE Base d ee ee 388 FatC hanging cece diee KEER RAAR oer oe ees 436 General Information ss 3 3 909 uc eta toads 384 MON DEB 4eneydu2Sededeeeh Se eb PPP 387
376. r position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passenger ALR ALR ALR ALR e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is e
377. r seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should never install LATCH compatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage If installing child seats in adjacent rear seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH compatible install the restraints using the vehi cle s seat belts LATCH Anchorages NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufacturer s directions carefully when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system E ls meets the seatback and are located just below the button with the anchorage symbol on the rear seat but are not visible You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear Ai window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side w
378. rakes if necessary Be sure to select an appropriate speed while driving in curves ACC may occasionally provide braking and or a driver alert that you consider unnecessary This may be the system s response to signs guardrails and other station ary objects in a curve This may also occur at the base of steep hills This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Using ACC On Hills it may not detect the vehicle until it s too late for the ACC When driving on hills ACC may not detect a vehicle in system to take action ACC will not detect a vehicle until your lane Depending on the speed vehicle load traffic it is completely in the lane There will not be sufficient conditions and the steepness of the hills ACC perfor distance to the lane changing vehicle Always be atten mance may be limited tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling In the illustration shown ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 Narrow Vehicles Stationary Objects And Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they vehicles For example ACC will not react in situations have moved fully i
379. ramming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button for unauthorized operation While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed interior switches for door locks and decklid release are disabled If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will pro vide the following audible and visible signals the horn will pulse the park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after three minutes turn all of the visual signals off after 15 additional minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the theft alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition system refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information
380. ransmis turned from the OFF to the RUN position sion damage REVERSE This range is used for moving the vehicle rearward WARNING Always stop before moving the shift lever to REVERSE Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the NEUTRAL ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision This range is used when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle 356 STARTING AND OPERATING M DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick mode to select a lower gear Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up ti
381. rature Control ATC Panel 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature hard or soft control buttons 6 7 10 11 Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Uconnect Touch System Set tings in this section of the manual 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode Manual Operation The system allows for manual selection of blower speed air distribution mode A C status and recirculation con trol The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selec
382. re A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed STARTING AND OPERATING 391 Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the replaced tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire 392 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inf
383. re are seven blower speeds available Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation if Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Automatic Temperature equipped with ATC The speeds can be selected using Controls Soft keys either hard heys or soft keys as follows Button Descriptions Applies To Both Hard keys And Soft keys Hard key The blower speed increases as you turn the control 1 A C Button clockwise from the lowest blower setting The blower Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning speed decreases as you turn the knob counter clockwise A C setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Soft key Uconnect Touch System 4 3 Press the blower soft key to enter the blower setting screen Once in the blower settings screen use the UP and DOWN arrows to adjust the blower speed setting or directly select the speed setting by pressing the blower bar area around the blower icon The blower speed increases as you press the UP arrow or move clockwise on the setting scale and decreases when press the DOWN arrow or move counter clockwise on the setting scale Soft key Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons 4 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the curr
384. reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant Control need to reset your cruise control ACC utilizes a radar sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you WARNING NOTE Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve ACC will maintain a fixed set speed e f the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration not to exceed the original set speed automatically to maintain a preset following distance while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead hic
385. reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline 410 STARTING AND OPERATING xe Materials Added to Fuel CAUTION Continued All gasoline sold in the United States is required to Eer contain effective detergent additives Use of additional An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition detergents or other additives is not needed under normal malfunctions can Cape the catalytic converter to conditions and they would result in additional cost overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or Therefore you should not have to add anything to the some light smoke your engine may be out of tune fael or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service Fuel System Cautions ME ord The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentra tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of
386. required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWEC speci fications if they are available 408 STARTING AND OPERATING M Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to e
387. ressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESC corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understee
388. rized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed engine transmission power steering or air condi maintenance schedule there are other components which tioning Such damage is not covered by the New may require servicing or replacement in the future Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465 Engine Oil Checking Oil Level 3 6L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Mainta
389. rn your Jump Starting Procedure skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK plosion 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories N WHAT TODOINEMERGENCIES 449 CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the d
390. rotect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M REAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the he
391. s 4 You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone 5 These commands can be used during a phone call after pushing the connect voice command bulton insert talking head icon on the steering wheel Please nate the call will be mubed while ihe VR session is active 8 Send dial tones for automanted systems i available while a call is active 7 Storng Dial tones in contact names is possible but only the first number encountered in a contact name will be sent For example if there is a number stored in the Home and Work numbers for the contact Voicemail password only the Home number will be sent 8 If your phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over BT than these commands will retam a response mdicaling thal the contact does not exist in the phonebook 9 Emergency and Towing assistance ame contacts the have been pre loaded in the phonebooks Commands such as Call Emergency and Call towing assistance will call the comesponding number stoned woth those contacts Note Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and are underlined in the green shaded boxes 030538628 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 General Information Uconnect Phone supports the following features This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Hands Free dialing via Voice Call John Smiths Mo bile
392. s e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors Advanced Front Airbag Features The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING WARNING Continued e No objects should be placed over or near the e Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in airbag on the instrument panel because any such ee objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a e Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster collision severe enough to cause the airbag to such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios inflate etc Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing Continued 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Supplemental Seat Mounted Si
393. scribed in your mobile phone User s Manual Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Voice Command For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition mm Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page before speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in your favorites phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e You can say O letter O for 0 zero e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported
394. se an electric shock and failure CAUTION Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Continued vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 CUPHOLDERS l re Front Seat Cupholders The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the M center console 035135226 Front Cupholders 035135225 Retractable Cover 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Heated and Cooled Cupholders If Equipped Press the Cold symbol once to turn on the cupholder Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled press the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off cupholders The cupholders are designed to hel
395. seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser lo cated in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or GS high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging On systems with Manual Climate Controls the Recirculation mode is not NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337 allowed in Mix Floor and Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be dis abled automatically if these modes are selected Attempt ing to use Recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Automatic Temperature Control ATC ATC Hard keys are located in the center of the instru ment panel Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch system screen Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO hard key or soft key button 9 on the Automatic Tempe
396. sion Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 Flowing Rising Water CAUTION WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path and cause your vehicle to sink into
397. slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel slip condition occurs AWD can also be manually se lected by moving the shift lever into the AutoStick mode or activating the windshield wipers for an extended period of time Drive mode RWD or AWD is displayed momentarily in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the gage area of the vehicle display when the transmission is first shifted into gear and if the drive mode changes during vehicle operation NOTE If the t CASE or SERVICE AWD SYSTEM warning message appears after engine start up or during driving it means that the AWD system is not functioning properly and that service is required Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Unequal tire sizes must not be used Unequal tire size may cause failure of the front differential and or the transfer case DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels 360 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a colli
398. st rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and erit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475 NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of th
399. stry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow ing licenses United States 0 4 MRXC4W4MA4 Canada 2546A C4W4MA4 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 6L Engine If Equipped This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 800dfabe line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD 5 7L Engine If Equipped This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 The manufac turer recommends the use of 89 octane for RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD STARTING AND OPERATING 407 optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
400. sult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual iri WATER iN PEL MEAR AAK ed ETE NKR AR a ae ty PCS in iv i WTESMETTEMT WAPEN WEBA Be CH PUEL FILL SE REAR WONDE ctm D DOME LIGHT FHOHTFOS LOW HBOODRELEAHE SECS ULATION MATETE FLA LEVEL DC A ONE BEAST aa 00 N j es gy DE Qt OD LFTG TE AE EASE ELECT ROA ES MEAN WeMDOW ELFZTESCALL FANS LIGTE WEAR POC LAMP AN LFTIETE DEFWOST AMD VENTILATING PAM WP DZRW MEIN THROTTLE DEFROST HEATED DPEN LOWEN AA GUTLET CHT WOL ETT n ca y P D e b od BATTERY ise ATET dnte ua TE ad tre AAT li Lipi JOM pad AR CONDITA CHALD SEAT Af COGRTION CHuARGINS TETTHET ARTHA DuTTOR w VO N D id Ww 20 LOWEN AUCHIIRS POWER Ero i e NOE ARBAG SLID DOOR UM LIDHTE ANU TETHER EON UcNMECIT STEERING FLUEI CHPLEREN LATCH BITTIDA SRS C e E AIRBAG 2 qap wd id Ii T UUETOA GYRE COOLANT Sum ElEHTAR mARBE GNE ININEATUCHH Len eli TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRUMTEYZTEM ARGO OFF 20 o Hy D ED eo Jd das inis nea Tiia Hakkit umm m DO
401. t touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces e f your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi cause that destroys the paint and protective coating 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The paint and decals cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491 e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner
402. t Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn ON 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the LOW TIRE message will turn off and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 402 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure r
403. t System oi sere PEE RR Traction Control System osa e 454 Electronic Power Distribution Center Fuses Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 206 209 Electronic Stability Control ESC 370 Electronic Vehicle Information Center imde pete ET ER ER see EE OR OE 241 283 Emergency Deck Lid Release 40 Emergency Trunk Release 40 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 450 Hazard Warning Flasher 22293 ez dno a eae 434 I n ARTT 436 JUMP SANS Gea 2 ead s p Ronde oe ORDE 446 Diere oi ao ka ER EERS EROR AUR E ARAS 434 die A ee Bo TE 453 Emission Control System Maintenance 461 PUSU 224a ees EE eee eee HE PRE 460 Duae 6 P 468 Pock Heater C 350 Break In Recommendations 44 6462 ARE RE 83 Checkin Oil Level 2 29 92 inite Hanae as 465 N INDEX 543 Compartment 454 2 265464 96444 955 459 460 Compartment Identification 2 444 ims 459 Coolant Antifreeze sss 479 508 Sun vak U 478 Exhaust Gas Caution 04 84 411 Pots TO Olt EP 349 Hooded Dianne 223 05 asd Es enon deg eiis 349 Fuel Reguirements iss hasie EE oe ER 407 JOM ODE osse En soene e Gee a5 3 wes 446 Multi Displacement ia ed sr dd DR ae oa 364 ON ie ore Coen Go OP ey eee AE 465 507 508 Oi Chase Interval ss as 2042 RAD rris 290 466 Oil Piller Cap sudes on on SNR AA DER a 466 467 OM Filter serie SR ER poe ee ees 468 Oil Fil
404. t key to return to the previous menu e Flash Headlight with Lock When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selection press the Flash Lights with Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 e Sound Horn with Lock When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection press the Sound Horn with Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn with Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection press the Sound Horn with Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e 1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors
405. t setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Unlatch The Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Transmitter Battery Re
406. t tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPM sensor ee STARTING AND OPERATING 399 NOTE e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure the tire or condition Base System e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless while adjusting your tire pressure technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire cau n wing on a BE PERD i i e Canses wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire ee ene ra tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the stopping ability tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte and to maintain the proper pressure nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain The TPMS consists
407. tact Voicemail password only the Home number will be sent 8 If your phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over BT than these commands will retam a response mdicaling thal the contact does not exist in the phonebook 9 Emergency and Towing assistance ame contacts the have been pre loaded in the phonebooks Commands such as Call Emergency and Call towing assistance will call the comesponding number stoned woth those contacts 030536629 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Uconnect Text Messaging Uconnect Text Messaging Reading Text Messages The commands can be spoken trom any screen after pushing the Uconnect Phone bution wa do HORE afueras MH EUN ree Ret pari ang ELe Slee Die Enter message from s5nge defined list provide will be read out by system or say over the List to hear all 18 vehicle audio defined messages System After the message While the message text is teel is read oul the displayed the following following commands commands are available after are available pushing the phone VR button automatically nderit talking Peed ione 1 ha Ee eee wath BET molle or fiwontes phone bok You can z and tie system wal aak you which phone number you Message Enter message from want io Send a message IO K NEMAR defined list provide by 2 fou can replace Mobile on Chas syslam or say List to 3 You can repace corn cae wi buipolag culi missed calle or ma bed cal
408. tanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Touch the Controls soft key then touch the Heated Steering Wheel soft key to turn on the heated steering wheel Press the Heated Steering Wheel soft key a second time to turn the heated steering wheel off NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the heated steering wheel and seat can be programmed to 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical conditions must exer cise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures espe cially if used for long periods Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cush ion This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This feature allows the brake accelerator and clutch pedals if equipped
409. tays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Infla tor Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The airbags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag Inflator Unit The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag unit is lo cated in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering column When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbag it signals the inflator un
410. tch 4 Within five seconds press and release the MEMORY button 1 or 2 The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped will display which memory position has been set N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 NOTE e Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile e The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To program your RKE transmitters perform the follow ing 1 Remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go 2 Select desired memory profile 1 or 2 3 Once the profile has been recalled press and release the SET S button on the memory switch then press and release the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 will display in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC 4 Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds NOTE Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your mem
411. tecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty The 12 Volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray has power available only when the ignition is in the ON or ACC positions Front Power Outlet WARNING Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicles not equipped with the ash receiver tray A fire leading to bodily injury could result UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257 The center console outlet is powered directly from the battery power available at all times Items plugged into this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent the engine from starting 072736519 Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 12 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel amp Power Outlet Console Rear 2 38 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION Continued To avoid serious injury or death e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cau
412. ted NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces 482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or p
413. ted This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings A C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turnin
414. tems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration 462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M For states that require an Inspection and Mainte I C nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test
415. ter Di posal sis Mi pom te grueso om a 468 Oil Selecllolk xx 4 EROR HAS Od de de ka 466 507 CILSUVBIBSUE uses s ts dra eee eee ae PS 467 B cuc C OT NE ETER 434 DUN 246586008 boo ee DE ED ie 346 Temperature Gauge EERS ER ete eae tats 281 Engine Oil Viscosity oo rog2 eee are eens aes 466 467 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 66 Entry System Illuminated sert RES 19 Izd P m 408 Event Data Recorder ss ask ID ER LE ARE Taser 70 Exhaust Gas Caution SS SE aea 84 411 Exhaust OVSICH 2444544 cher hk Sd ee d s 04 476 Exterior Folding Mitr a aeseeesrdesvpreery aa 98 Extenor Do EID seaga siota wareg got ahora iere 189 PICHON Lie ES a re so ue 0 oa SORG Sese 2 oa 87 Piller Location Puel sessu eee teen ce eee yen 278 Filters vim oiu Pr 468 Dar C ond ONE vo uci doe 208 2 RE CR SON 339 472 Luces ues cues he PERKE AA RR EDE 468 508 Encie IL DERS seep HERALD 2E 468 Flash To Pass 544 INDEX NEE Id Flashers Hazard Vall sie oos d MERE ode BREED 3 99 434 TA SI ai Ae eee oan eee oe ee 87 193 273 Plat Tie Cote scuro Ros dox OE OE mre ed 9d 436 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruise Range soene ie es Be Hi in aa ea ee A14 Bied Oil sis are RIDE DRAAI KS ages 413 Fuel Requirements suide ae risset 411 412 Maintenance 2 lt 44 sac teu 9m vox ws 414 Replacement Pats sies nace dose da eppi 414 vin p M DTE 414 Flooded Engine Starting 5 2 sorum DE 349 Floor Console eee 262 Fid Capa ciles RTL TC 507 Flui
416. tes off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead console and contain one two or three dots lines desig nating the different HomeLink channels 034033576 HomeLink Buttons N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active WARNING e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide CO which is odorless and colorless Carbon Monoxide is poi sonous when inhaled and cause you and others to be severely injured or killed NOTE Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assis tance Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for up to 20 seconds The EVIC will display CL
417. the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Place the ignition in the RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the EVIC display states CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED Note that all channels will be erased Indi vidual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to complete the training for rolling code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you are having any problems or require assistance please call tol
418. the setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Voice Response Length When in this display you may change the Voice Response Length settings To change the Voice Response Length 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See press the Brief or Detailed soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Touchscreen Beep When in this display you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touch screen button soft key is pressed Press the Touchscreen Beep soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Navigation Turn By Turn in Cluster When this feature is selected the turn by turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route Io make your selection press the Navigation Turn By Turn in Cluster soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Fuel Saver Display in Cluster The ECO message is located in the instrument cluster display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press the Fuel Saver Display soft key until a check mark appears n
419. the time To change the Sync Time setting press and release the On or Off soft key followed by pressing the arrow back soft key 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Safety Assistance e Front Collision Warning Press the Front Collision Warning soft key to change this display The Front Collision Warning FCW feature can be can be set to Far set to Near or turned Off The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This allows for a more dynamic driving experience To change FCW status press and release the Off Near or Far button followed by pressing the arrow back soft key For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Park Assist Press the Park Assist soft key to change this display The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF To change the Park Assist status press and release the Off Sound Only or Sounds and Display button foll
420. the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to distances for each zone a hitch receiver The static grid lines will show separate WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Park View Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 CAUTION Turning ParkView On Or Off With Touch Screen Radio e To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only be used as a parking aid The Park View camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your 2 Press the More soft key drive path 3 Press the Settings soft key EN 1 Turn the Radio on To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to 4 Press the Safety amp Driving Assistance soft key stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView 5 Press the check box soft key next to Parkview Backup Camera to enable disable NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth D
421. their seatbelts If a front seatbelt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will chime as a single notification and illumi nate the Seat Belt Reminder Light then will proceed to the 96 second reminder sequence The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert Programming NOTE Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend de activating the BeltAlert The BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following proce dure 1 With all doors closed and the ignition in any position except ON RUN buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step NOTE You must perform the following steps within 60 seconds of cycling the ignition to the ON RUN position N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 3 Within 60 seconds of cycling the ignition to the ON RUN position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the se
422. they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in a collision Weight distributing systems may not be compat ible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable rec reational vehicle dealer for additional information 422 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the opt
423. this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings e Equalizer When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale in between the and soft keys followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Speed Adjusted Volume Decreases volume relative to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the Off 1 2 or 3 soft key followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Music Info Cleanup This feature helps organize music files for optimized music navigation To make your selection press the Music Info Cleanup soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key Phone Bluetooth After pressing the Phone Bluetooth soft key the follow ing settings will be available 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Touch Supplement SIRIUS Setup After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft key the following settings will be available e Channel Skip SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection press the Channel Skip Seats soft key select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e S
424. tic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press the Easy Exit Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Engine Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status press the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft key followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status press the or soft key to select your desired time interval Press the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Compass Settings After pressing the Compass Settings soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the
425. time so check the belt occasionally and 1 To install a child restraint with ALR first pull enough pull it tight if necessary of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee To attach a child restraint tether strap 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path 1 Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the for the strap between the anchor and the child seat seat where you are placing the child restraint 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child restraint to the anchor B and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind Tether Strap Mounting the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether 1 Cover A Tether Strap Hook strap 3 Attaching Strap B Tether Anchor N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
426. ting Your Vehicle for more information on The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature release handle It is located on the inside of the trunk lid near the latch and is coated so that it glows in a darkened TRUNK SAFETY WARNING trunk Pull on the handle to open the trunk WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke Trunk Emergency Release NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen ger Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during a
427. ting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxi mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature e The Ignition Off time is programmable using the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12 Volt 13 Amps electrical power outlets on this vehicle Both of the power outlets are protected by a fuse Insert a cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power outlets for use to ensure proper operation NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used CAUTION e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse pro
428. tions pop will appear and you can choose between Editing the number or resetting the number to default Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available and supported by Bluetooth on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service pro vider for the features that you have Ways To Initiate A Phone Call Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect Phone e Redial e Dial by touching in the number e Voice Command Dial Digital Contact Redial or Call Back e Favorite Phonebook e Mobile Phonebook e Recent Call Log e SMS Message Viewer 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE All of the above operations except Redial can be done with 1 call or less active Dial By Saying A Number e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Dial 248 555 1212 e The Uconnect Phone will dial 248 555 1212 the number Call By Saying A Name e Press the amp button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call John Doe Mobile e The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated with John Doe or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe Ca
429. to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type 396 STARTING AND OPERATING tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride a EI Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper E E maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being C Y performed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross SS ER shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed 055703771 Tire Rotation NS 1AH TING AND OPERATING 397 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPM
430. to adjust the e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu fluid level accurately facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper other than that recommended by the manufacturer maintenance intervals will result in more frequent fluid and filter If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu fluid and filter should be changed ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur ther information Continued 488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ee All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and front differential The exterior surface of these compo nents should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible The transfer case fluid fill inspection plug is located in the middle of the rear housing To inspect the transfer case fluid level remove the fill inspection plug The fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole Use this plug to add fluid as required The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover near the halfshaft attachment To inspect the differ ential fluid level remove the fill plug The fluid level should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the h
431. to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The switch is located on the front side of the driver s seat cushion side shield UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 e The pedals can be adjusted while driving e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control sys tem is on The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In formation System EVIC if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out Adjust able Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or Adjustable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse CAUTION Adjustable Pedal Switch Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage toward the front of the vehicle to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path 032036861 Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward toward the driver e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving You could lose control and have an accident Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
432. top flashing and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 404 STARTING AND OPERATING x Id Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 81979401 If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash and the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors eee STARTING AND OPERATING 405 The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYS
433. tory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate ee STARTING AND OPERATING 419 NOTE e Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWKRs e Refer to the Tire Placard for your vehicle s proper tire pressure TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on
434. trols or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the Key Fob from vehicle cycle the ignition OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter a Keyless Ignition Node KIN and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle After cycling the ignition switch to the ON RUN posi tion the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle runnin
435. ts 287 E EVIC Red Telltale Lights sis ese 4640475 288 o Oil Change Required CPGCLPCOnOM 246246 GEWEER RAAR Rn dC A yenice peed sie Me e urs Gren es eee es 293 Bike io AE OT AE 294 EL IS oos eene aes gh ER EO EA DE 295 D Vehicle Info Customer Information Features 295 Pl Wiessa CCS PETPRET eed Gt 295 EL Tarn Mew OU suu eua ssa GEE Ho xS OE 296 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M W Uconnect Touch Settings 296 mha TITLE 296 ABON KC Vs rm 296 D Uconnect Touch 4 3 Settings Customer Programmable Features 296 O Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Settings Customer Programmable Features 309 ll iPod USB MP3 Control If Equipped 324 N Kicker High Performance Sound System With Driver Selectable Surround DSS IP EGQUIppe EED ARE RA ER E qu d 925 ll Steering Wheel Audio Controls MEUPE c3 4 09 23 HR beasts s MED 326 O Radio Operation sy sce ok Er si EEUE d 327 HEL Plover sesse SR ccs 999 ORE x Sor aa 92 B CD DVD Disc Maintenance 328 ll Radio Operation And Mobile Phones 328 B Climate Controls 00005 329 O General Overview 2 00 ee eee 329 O Climate Control Functions 336 DO Automatic Temperature Control ATC 337 EG bere Nils eperera degen sneer dod 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES d 2 9 6
436. turer s in structions for cleaning 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de Maintaining Your Airbag System ployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you in another collision Have the airbags protect you Do not modify the components or seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac wiring including adding any kind of badges or tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con upper right side of the instrument panel Do not troller ORC system serviced as well modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Continued NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorize
437. ty after a battery disconnect PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage ee STARTING AND OPERATING 365 NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away a sssest from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking Parking Brake brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise When the parking brake is applied with the ignition the load on the transmission locking mechanism may switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The the instrument cluster will illuminate parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle 3
438. ubscription Information New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with your radio Following expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Sub scription Information screen in order to re subscribe Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates For further information refer to the Uconnect Touch User s Manual KICKER HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER SELECTABLE SURROUND DSS IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio amplifier that provides 5 1 channel simulated surround UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 sound from any stereo audio source A new feature of the KICKER audio system offers the ability to choose sur round sound for any audio source Audio Surround is o
439. ued increase or decrease the lumbar support Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar e Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the support shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to Lo the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path 030934978 Power Lumbar If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also be equipped with power lumbar The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward or rearward to Power Lumbar Switch 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Heated Seats If Equipped WARNING Continued On some models the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This seatbacks a may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated seat that has been overheated could cause serious using the Uconnect Touch System burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat WARNING e Persons who are unab
440. uel Economy Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Fuel Economy displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press and release the UP DOWN buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy func tions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode e Distance To Empty DTE e Miles Per Gallon MPG Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion N m f 2 T Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode If Fuel Fen nornu Equipped Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset BUp ag 3 RESET When the fuel economy is reset the display will read OTE LOW FUEL RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will MPG 10 eU continue from the last fuel average reading before the LE reset Irni 041009379 The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the average fuel economy in the EVIC display This message Fuel Saver Mode On will appear whenever MDS if equipped allows the This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving ina fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify in a fuel efficient manner driving habits in order to increase fuel economy N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 Distance To Empty
441. ugh slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 Max loading as defined on the Tire and Load ing Information placard Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 427 WARNING Continued Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage 2 GTW 3 GAWR Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for informa tion on tread wear indicators and for the proper inspection procedure 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor Towing Requirements Tires mation in Starting and Operating for information 5 on replacement tires and for the proper tire replace ment procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and GAW
442. uld be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493 To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the rig
443. um protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467 The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine C
444. und A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 6 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench as an assem bly Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly Preparations For Jacking Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the 060535620 edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery areas Jack Fastener N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 439 WARNING NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Jacking And Changing A Tire WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your 3 Set the parking brake vee e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 4 Place the shift lever into PARK 5 Turn OFF the ignition the vehicle Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised 6 Block the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jack ing Poon Por example if changing Set the
445. ur Instrument Panel for further information Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver s door trim panel 030434975 Power Mirror Control The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but tons and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a mirror press the mirror select button for the mirror that you want to adjust Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE A light in the select button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Power Folding Mirrors If Equipped The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L left and R right Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the normal driving position NOTE Pressing the power folding mirror switch for more than four seconds or if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h will disable the folding feature If the mirrors are in the folded position and vehicle speed is equal to or greater than 5 mph 8 km h they will automatically unfold Heated Mirrors If E
446. ust not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message to be displayed in the EVIC 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM CAUTION WARNING e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable e Drivers must be careful when backing up even to recognize every obstacle including small ob stacles Parking curbs might be temporarily de tected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist sys tem Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedes trians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 WARNING Continued e Before using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system it is strongly recommended that the ball mount an
447. utomatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 NOTE e The SmartBeam system can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area To activate the delay feature turn OFF the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature If you turn the headlights park lights or ignition switch ON again the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The Headlight Time Delay is programmable using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument
448. ve too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Continued 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug WARMING NE onsin sed belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous accident Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during an accident You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together Removing Slack from Belt 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle AE SING The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to internal injury in an
449. vehicle audio system if on and will display a pop up on screen showing Answer Ignore or Transfer Press the button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VR button and say Dial or Call followed 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress Or you can place a call on hold by touching the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen then dial a number from the dialpad recent calls or from the phone books To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Also you can press the Swap soft key on the Phone main screen Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the End soft
450. vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading For the most accurate compass performance the compass must be set using the following steps NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 040506040 7 8 9 Compass Variance Map LA e Perform Compass Calibration Press the Calibration key to change this setting This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks did Audio After pressing the Audio soft key the following settings will be available e BalancelFade When in
451. ver located on the outboard side of the seat lean back to the desired position and release the lever To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever Manual Recline Lever WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Head Restraints Active Head Restraints Front Seats The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury Ace Head Vesta e Inte een ob a Ted icti j f Dy pri up nui de ale ADAM aot impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top ot minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear head and the AHR 3 WARNING The AHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact If the AHRs do not return to their normal position see your authorized dealer immediately The head restraints for all occupant s must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death
452. vice must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Key Fob Remote Keyless x2 Entry RKE transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start e Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 WARNING How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon S EE EE oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car e Doors closed bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious s Hood aoci injury or death when inhaled
453. wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer N rFYOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 533 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about m
454. which mode is selected 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE E Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation The speed control buttons located on the right side of the steering wheel operates the ACC system M RES ON OFF T p CANCEL SET 1 DISTANCE SETTING 4 CANCEL 2 RES 5 ON OFF 3 SET 6 MODE NOTE Any chassis suspension modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h When the system is turned on and in the READY state the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC dis plays Adaptive Cruise Ready When the system is OFF the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Control Off NOTE You cannot enable ACC under the following conditions e When you apply the brakes e When the parking brake is set N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 e When the automatic transmission is in PARK RE VERSE or NEUTRAL e When pushing the RES button without a previously set speed in memory Adaptive To Activate Cruise Control Push and release the ON OFF button The ACC menu in Ready the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Ready 96789 mi e AS Adaptive Cruise Control Ready To turn the system OFF push and release the ON OFF button again At this time the system will turn off and the EVIC will displ
455. xceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty ee STARTING AND OPERATING 409 If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold driveability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT
456. y air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis After Starting charged battery booster cables may be used to The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery decrease as the engine warms up in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Start ing in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 350 STARTING AND OPERATING xe ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that a complete stop is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
457. your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463 If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Reg

2011 Dodge Charger Owners` Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents